CA2226489C - Communication system - Google Patents

Communication system Download PDF

Info

Publication number
CA2226489C
CA2226489C CA 2226489 CA2226489A CA2226489C CA 2226489 C CA2226489 C CA 2226489C CA 2226489 CA2226489 CA 2226489 CA 2226489 A CA2226489 A CA 2226489A CA 2226489 C CA2226489 C CA 2226489C
Authority
CA
Canada
Prior art keywords
signal
data
video
receiver
level
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Expired - Lifetime
Application number
CA 2226489
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
CA2226489A1 (en
Inventor
Mitsuaki Oshima
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Panasonic Holdings Corp
Original Assignee
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Family has litigation
First worldwide family litigation filed litigation Critical https://patents.darts-ip.com/?family=26409144&utm_source=google_patent&utm_medium=platform_link&utm_campaign=public_patent_search&patent=CA2226489(C) "Global patent litigation dataset” by Darts-ip is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 International License.
Application filed by Matsushita Electric Industrial Co Ltd filed Critical Matsushita Electric Industrial Co Ltd
Priority to CA 2332405 priority Critical patent/CA2332405C/en
Priority to CA 2331203 priority patent/CA2331203C/en
Publication of CA2226489A1 publication Critical patent/CA2226489A1/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of CA2226489C publication Critical patent/CA2226489C/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Expired - Lifetime legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/004Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using forward error control
    • H04L1/0056Systems characterized by the type of code used
    • H04L1/0057Block codes
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L27/00Modulated-carrier systems
    • H04L27/32Carrier systems characterised by combinations of two or more of the types covered by groups H04L27/02, H04L27/10, H04L27/18 or H04L27/26
    • H04L27/34Amplitude- and phase-modulated carrier systems, e.g. quadrature-amplitude modulated carrier systems
    • H04L27/36Modulator circuits; Transmitter circuits
    • H04L27/362Modulation using more than one carrier, e.g. with quadrature carriers, separately amplitude modulated
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H03ELECTRONIC CIRCUITRY
    • H03MCODING; DECODING; CODE CONVERSION IN GENERAL
    • H03M13/00Coding, decoding or code conversion, for error detection or error correction; Coding theory basic assumptions; Coding bounds; Error probability evaluation methods; Channel models; Simulation or testing of codes
    • H03M13/03Error detection or forward error correction by redundancy in data representation, i.e. code words containing more digits than the source words
    • H03M13/23Error detection or forward error correction by redundancy in data representation, i.e. code words containing more digits than the source words using convolutional codes, e.g. unit memory codes
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H03ELECTRONIC CIRCUITRY
    • H03MCODING; DECODING; CODE CONVERSION IN GENERAL
    • H03M13/00Coding, decoding or code conversion, for error detection or error correction; Coding theory basic assumptions; Coding bounds; Error probability evaluation methods; Channel models; Simulation or testing of codes
    • H03M13/25Error detection or forward error correction by signal space coding, i.e. adding redundancy in the signal constellation, e.g. Trellis Coded Modulation [TCM]
    • H03M13/253Error detection or forward error correction by signal space coding, i.e. adding redundancy in the signal constellation, e.g. Trellis Coded Modulation [TCM] with concatenated codes
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H03ELECTRONIC CIRCUITRY
    • H03MCODING; DECODING; CODE CONVERSION IN GENERAL
    • H03M13/00Coding, decoding or code conversion, for error detection or error correction; Coding theory basic assumptions; Coding bounds; Error probability evaluation methods; Channel models; Simulation or testing of codes
    • H03M13/25Error detection or forward error correction by signal space coding, i.e. adding redundancy in the signal constellation, e.g. Trellis Coded Modulation [TCM]
    • H03M13/256Error detection or forward error correction by signal space coding, i.e. adding redundancy in the signal constellation, e.g. Trellis Coded Modulation [TCM] with trellis coding, e.g. with convolutional codes and TCM
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H03ELECTRONIC CIRCUITRY
    • H03MCODING; DECODING; CODE CONVERSION IN GENERAL
    • H03M13/00Coding, decoding or code conversion, for error detection or error correction; Coding theory basic assumptions; Coding bounds; Error probability evaluation methods; Channel models; Simulation or testing of codes
    • H03M13/29Coding, decoding or code conversion, for error detection or error correction; Coding theory basic assumptions; Coding bounds; Error probability evaluation methods; Channel models; Simulation or testing of codes combining two or more codes or code structures, e.g. product codes, generalised product codes, concatenated codes, inner and outer codes
    • H03M13/2933Coding, decoding or code conversion, for error detection or error correction; Coding theory basic assumptions; Coding bounds; Error probability evaluation methods; Channel models; Simulation or testing of codes combining two or more codes or code structures, e.g. product codes, generalised product codes, concatenated codes, inner and outer codes using a block and a convolutional code
    • H03M13/2936Coding, decoding or code conversion, for error detection or error correction; Coding theory basic assumptions; Coding bounds; Error probability evaluation methods; Channel models; Simulation or testing of codes combining two or more codes or code structures, e.g. product codes, generalised product codes, concatenated codes, inner and outer codes using a block and a convolutional code comprising an outer Reed-Solomon code and an inner convolutional code
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H03ELECTRONIC CIRCUITRY
    • H03MCODING; DECODING; CODE CONVERSION IN GENERAL
    • H03M13/00Coding, decoding or code conversion, for error detection or error correction; Coding theory basic assumptions; Coding bounds; Error probability evaluation methods; Channel models; Simulation or testing of codes
    • H03M13/35Unequal or adaptive error protection, e.g. by providing a different level of protection according to significance of source information or by adapting the coding according to the change of transmission channel characteristics
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H03ELECTRONIC CIRCUITRY
    • H03MCODING; DECODING; CODE CONVERSION IN GENERAL
    • H03M13/00Coding, decoding or code conversion, for error detection or error correction; Coding theory basic assumptions; Coding bounds; Error probability evaluation methods; Channel models; Simulation or testing of codes
    • H03M13/35Unequal or adaptive error protection, e.g. by providing a different level of protection according to significance of source information or by adapting the coding according to the change of transmission channel characteristics
    • H03M13/356Unequal error protection [UEP]
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H03ELECTRONIC CIRCUITRY
    • H03MCODING; DECODING; CODE CONVERSION IN GENERAL
    • H03M13/00Coding, decoding or code conversion, for error detection or error correction; Coding theory basic assumptions; Coding bounds; Error probability evaluation methods; Channel models; Simulation or testing of codes
    • H03M13/65Purpose and implementation aspects
    • H03M13/6522Intended application, e.g. transmission or communication standard
    • H03M13/6538ATSC VBS systems
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/004Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using forward error control
    • H04L1/0041Arrangements at the transmitter end
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/004Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using forward error control
    • H04L1/0045Arrangements at the receiver end
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/004Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using forward error control
    • H04L1/0045Arrangements at the receiver end
    • H04L1/0054Maximum-likelihood or sequential decoding, e.g. Viterbi, Fano, ZJ algorithms
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/004Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using forward error control
    • H04L1/0056Systems characterized by the type of code used
    • H04L1/0057Block codes
    • H04L1/0058Block-coded modulation
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/004Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using forward error control
    • H04L1/0056Systems characterized by the type of code used
    • H04L1/0059Convolutional codes
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/004Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using forward error control
    • H04L1/0056Systems characterized by the type of code used
    • H04L1/0059Convolutional codes
    • H04L1/006Trellis-coded modulation
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/004Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using forward error control
    • H04L1/0056Systems characterized by the type of code used
    • H04L1/0064Concatenated codes
    • H04L1/0065Serial concatenated codes
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L25/00Baseband systems
    • H04L25/38Synchronous or start-stop systems, e.g. for Baudot code
    • H04L25/40Transmitting circuits; Receiving circuits
    • H04L25/49Transmitting circuits; Receiving circuits using code conversion at the transmitter; using predistortion; using insertion of idle bits for obtaining a desired frequency spectrum; using three or more amplitude levels ; Baseband coding techniques specific to data transmission systems
    • H04L25/497Transmitting circuits; Receiving circuits using code conversion at the transmitter; using predistortion; using insertion of idle bits for obtaining a desired frequency spectrum; using three or more amplitude levels ; Baseband coding techniques specific to data transmission systems by correlative coding, e.g. partial response coding or echo modulation coding transmitters and receivers for partial response systems
    • H04L25/4975Correlative coding using Tomlinson precoding, Harashima precoding, Trellis precoding or GPRS
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L27/00Modulated-carrier systems
    • H04L27/02Amplitude-modulated carrier systems, e.g. using on-off keying; Single sideband or vestigial sideband modulation
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L27/00Modulated-carrier systems
    • H04L27/02Amplitude-modulated carrier systems, e.g. using on-off keying; Single sideband or vestigial sideband modulation
    • H04L27/04Modulator circuits; Transmitter circuits
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L27/00Modulated-carrier systems
    • H04L27/18Phase-modulated carrier systems, i.e. using phase-shift keying
    • H04L27/183Multiresolution systems
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L27/00Modulated-carrier systems
    • H04L27/26Systems using multi-frequency codes
    • H04L27/2601Multicarrier modulation systems
    • H04L27/2602Signal structure
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L27/00Modulated-carrier systems
    • H04L27/26Systems using multi-frequency codes
    • H04L27/2601Multicarrier modulation systems
    • H04L27/2602Signal structure
    • H04L27/2604Multiresolution systems
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L27/00Modulated-carrier systems
    • H04L27/26Systems using multi-frequency codes
    • H04L27/2601Multicarrier modulation systems
    • H04L27/2626Arrangements specific to the transmitter only
    • H04L27/2627Modulators
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L27/00Modulated-carrier systems
    • H04L27/26Systems using multi-frequency codes
    • H04L27/2601Multicarrier modulation systems
    • H04L27/2647Arrangements specific to the receiver only
    • H04L27/2649Demodulators
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L27/00Modulated-carrier systems
    • H04L27/32Carrier systems characterised by combinations of two or more of the types covered by groups H04L27/02, H04L27/10, H04L27/18 or H04L27/26
    • H04L27/34Amplitude- and phase-modulated carrier systems, e.g. quadrature-amplitude modulated carrier systems
    • H04L27/3405Modifications of the signal space to increase the efficiency of transmission, e.g. reduction of the bit error rate, bandwidth, or average power
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L27/00Modulated-carrier systems
    • H04L27/32Carrier systems characterised by combinations of two or more of the types covered by groups H04L27/02, H04L27/10, H04L27/18 or H04L27/26
    • H04L27/34Amplitude- and phase-modulated carrier systems, e.g. quadrature-amplitude modulated carrier systems
    • H04L27/3488Multiresolution systems
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L27/00Modulated-carrier systems
    • H04L27/32Carrier systems characterised by combinations of two or more of the types covered by groups H04L27/02, H04L27/10, H04L27/18 or H04L27/26
    • H04L27/34Amplitude- and phase-modulated carrier systems, e.g. quadrature-amplitude modulated carrier systems
    • H04L27/36Modulator circuits; Transmitter circuits
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L27/00Modulated-carrier systems
    • H04L27/32Carrier systems characterised by combinations of two or more of the types covered by groups H04L27/02, H04L27/10, H04L27/18 or H04L27/26
    • H04L27/34Amplitude- and phase-modulated carrier systems, e.g. quadrature-amplitude modulated carrier systems
    • H04L27/38Demodulator circuits; Receiver circuits
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L27/00Modulated-carrier systems
    • H04L27/32Carrier systems characterised by combinations of two or more of the types covered by groups H04L27/02, H04L27/10, H04L27/18 or H04L27/26
    • H04L27/34Amplitude- and phase-modulated carrier systems, e.g. quadrature-amplitude modulated carrier systems
    • H04L27/38Demodulator circuits; Receiver circuits
    • H04L27/3845Demodulator circuits; Receiver circuits using non - coherent demodulation, i.e. not using a phase synchronous carrier
    • H04L27/3854Demodulator circuits; Receiver circuits using non - coherent demodulation, i.e. not using a phase synchronous carrier using a non - coherent carrier, including systems with baseband correction for phase or frequency offset
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0001Arrangements for dividing the transmission path
    • H04L5/0003Two-dimensional division
    • H04L5/0005Time-frequency
    • H04L5/0007Time-frequency the frequencies being orthogonal, e.g. OFDM(A), DMT
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0044Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path allocation of payload
    • H04L5/0046Determination of how many bits are transmitted on different sub-channels
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N11/00Colour television systems
    • H04N11/24High-definition television systems
    • H04N11/26High-definition television systems involving two-channel transmission
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/30Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using hierarchical techniques, e.g. scalability
    • H04N19/37Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using hierarchical techniques, e.g. scalability with arrangements for assigning different transmission priorities to video input data or to video coded data
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/60Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using transform coding
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/60Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using transform coding
    • H04N19/63Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using transform coding using sub-band based transform, e.g. wavelets
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/20Servers specifically adapted for the distribution of content, e.g. VOD servers; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/23Processing of content or additional data; Elementary server operations; Server middleware
    • H04N21/234Processing of video elementary streams, e.g. splicing of video streams, manipulating MPEG-4 scene graphs
    • H04N21/2343Processing of video elementary streams, e.g. splicing of video streams, manipulating MPEG-4 scene graphs involving reformatting operations of video signals for distribution or compliance with end-user requests or end-user device requirements
    • H04N21/234327Processing of video elementary streams, e.g. splicing of video streams, manipulating MPEG-4 scene graphs involving reformatting operations of video signals for distribution or compliance with end-user requests or end-user device requirements by decomposing into layers, e.g. base layer and one or more enhancement layers
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/20Servers specifically adapted for the distribution of content, e.g. VOD servers; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/23Processing of content or additional data; Elementary server operations; Server middleware
    • H04N21/238Interfacing the downstream path of the transmission network, e.g. adapting the transmission rate of a video stream to network bandwidth; Processing of multiplex streams
    • H04N21/2383Channel coding or modulation of digital bit-stream, e.g. QPSK modulation
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/41Structure of client; Structure of client peripherals
    • H04N21/426Internal components of the client ; Characteristics thereof
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/43Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
    • H04N21/438Interfacing the downstream path of the transmission network originating from a server, e.g. retrieving MPEG packets from an IP network
    • H04N21/4382Demodulation or channel decoding, e.g. QPSK demodulation
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/43Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
    • H04N21/438Interfacing the downstream path of the transmission network originating from a server, e.g. retrieving MPEG packets from an IP network
    • H04N21/4383Accessing a communication channel
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/43Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
    • H04N21/442Monitoring of processes or resources, e.g. detecting the failure of a recording device, monitoring the downstream bandwidth, the number of times a movie has been viewed, the storage space available from the internal hard disk
    • H04N21/44209Monitoring of downstream path of the transmission network originating from a server, e.g. bandwidth variations of a wireless network
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/43Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
    • H04N21/442Monitoring of processes or resources, e.g. detecting the failure of a recording device, monitoring the downstream bandwidth, the number of times a movie has been viewed, the storage space available from the internal hard disk
    • H04N21/4425Monitoring of client processing errors or hardware failure
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/45Management operations performed by the client for facilitating the reception of or the interaction with the content or administrating data related to the end-user or to the client device itself, e.g. learning user preferences for recommending movies, resolving scheduling conflicts
    • H04N21/462Content or additional data management, e.g. creating a master electronic program guide from data received from the Internet and a Head-end, controlling the complexity of a video stream by scaling the resolution or bit-rate based on the client capabilities
    • H04N21/4621Controlling the complexity of the content stream or additional data, e.g. lowering the resolution or bit-rate of the video stream for a mobile client with a small screen
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/60Network structure or processes for video distribution between server and client or between remote clients; Control signalling between clients, server and network components; Transmission of management data between server and client, e.g. sending from server to client commands for recording incoming content stream; Communication details between server and client 
    • H04N21/63Control signaling related to video distribution between client, server and network components; Network processes for video distribution between server and clients or between remote clients, e.g. transmitting basic layer and enhancement layers over different transmission paths, setting up a peer-to-peer communication via Internet between remote STB's; Communication protocols; Addressing
    • H04N21/631Multimode Transmission, e.g. transmitting basic layers and enhancement layers of the content over different transmission paths or transmitting with different error corrections, different keys or with different transmission protocols
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N5/00Details of television systems
    • H04N5/44Receiver circuitry for the reception of television signals according to analogue transmission standards
    • H04N5/455Demodulation-circuits
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N7/00Television systems
    • H04N7/24Systems for the transmission of television signals using pulse code modulation
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/004Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using forward error control
    • H04L1/0056Systems characterized by the type of code used
    • H04L1/007Unequal error protection
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L2001/0098Unequal error protection
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L27/00Modulated-carrier systems
    • H04L27/0014Carrier regulation
    • H04L2027/0024Carrier regulation at the receiver end
    • H04L2027/0026Correction of carrier offset
    • H04L2027/0036Correction of carrier offset using a recovered symbol clock
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L27/00Modulated-carrier systems
    • H04L27/0014Carrier regulation
    • H04L2027/0044Control loops for carrier regulation
    • H04L2027/0053Closed loops
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L27/00Modulated-carrier systems
    • H04L27/0014Carrier regulation
    • H04L2027/0044Control loops for carrier regulation
    • H04L2027/0063Elements of loops
    • H04L2027/0067Phase error detectors
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/30Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using hierarchical techniques, e.g. scalability
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/43Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
    • H04N21/44Processing of video elementary streams, e.g. splicing a video clip retrieved from local storage with an incoming video stream, rendering scenes according to MPEG-4 scene graphs
    • H04N21/4402Processing of video elementary streams, e.g. splicing a video clip retrieved from local storage with an incoming video stream, rendering scenes according to MPEG-4 scene graphs involving reformatting operations of video signals for household redistribution, storage or real-time display
    • H04N21/440263Processing of video elementary streams, e.g. splicing a video clip retrieved from local storage with an incoming video stream, rendering scenes according to MPEG-4 scene graphs involving reformatting operations of video signals for household redistribution, storage or real-time display by altering the spatial resolution, e.g. for displaying on a connected PDA
    • H04N21/440272Processing of video elementary streams, e.g. splicing a video clip retrieved from local storage with an incoming video stream, rendering scenes according to MPEG-4 scene graphs involving reformatting operations of video signals for household redistribution, storage or real-time display by altering the spatial resolution, e.g. for displaying on a connected PDA for performing aspect ratio conversion
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N7/00Television systems
    • H04N7/015High-definition television systems

Abstract

At the transmitter side, carrier waves are modulated according to an input signal for producing relevant signal points in a signal space diagram. The input signal is divided into, two, first and second, data streams. The signal points are divided into signal point groups to which data of the first data stream are assigned. Also, data of the second data stream are assigned to the signal points of each signal point group. A difference in the transmission error rate between first and second data streams is developed by shifting the signal points to other positions in the space diagram. At the receiver side, the first and/or second data streams can be reconstructed from a received signal. In TV
broadcast service, a TV signal is divided by a transmitter into, low and high, frequency band components which are designated as a first and a second data stream respectively.
Upon receiving the TV signal, a receiver can reproduce only the low frequency band component or both the low and high frequency band components, depending on its capability.

Description

= CA 02226489 1998-03-17 s, SPECIFl r~TIoN
TITLE OF T.~ I NYENTION
C ication System ~ A~r~RnuND OF TR~ I~V~NTION
1. Field. of the InventLon:
The present ~nvention relate~ to ~ cr ln;cation sy~tem for transmission/receptlon of a digital ~ignal through modulation of its carrier wave and demodulation of the modu~ate~ 6ignal.
l~ 2. Description o~ ~he Prior Art:
Di~ital c ~nication system6 have been u~ed in various fields. P~rticularly, digital video signal tran~~l6sion techniqu.les have ~een improved remarkably.
Among them iB a digita~ TV si~nal trans~i~ion ~ethod.
So far, such digital TV signal tra~smission sy6tem are in particular use for e.g. transmissio~ between TV stations.
They will soon be utilized for terre6trial and~r satellite broadca6t ~ervice in every country of the world.
The TV broadca6t 6ystems including HDTV, PCM music, FAX, and other inf~mation service are now demanded to increase desired dat~ in quantity ~nd qusl~ty for satisfying millionq of 60phi~ticated viewers. ~n particular, the data has to be increased in a g1ven band~idth of frequency allocated for TV
broadcas,t service. The data to ~e tran6mit~ed is always ~S abundant. and provided as much as handled with up-to-date techniques of the time. It is ideal to modify or ch~nge the e~isting signal trans~ission ~ystem correspon~irlg to an ~_ CA 02226489 1998-03-17 increase in the data amount wlth time.
Ho~ever, the TV ~roadcast serviee is a public busi~ess and ca~aot ~o fur*her without consider~ng the interests and benefit,Eiof viewer~. It iB eBsential to have any new service appre~ Lb}e with e~isti~g TV receiYer6 aud di~pl~ye. More particularl~, the compatibility of a system is much desired for provi~ing both old a~d new 6e~vices simultaneously or ~ne new ~ervice which can be intercepted by either of the e~isting and advanced receiver~.
It i5 under6tood that ~ny new digitnl TV bro~dcast system t,o be introduced ha6 to be ~rra~g~d for data e~tension in ~rder to re~pond to future ~ ~n~R and tec~lological advantal,es and al80~ for compatible action to allow the e~isting receivers to receive transmissions.
The e~rnnRion capability and co~atible performance of prior art di~ital TV system will be e~plained.
A dieital 6atellite TV system is l~nown in which NISC TV
signals compressed to an about 6 Mbps are multiplexed by time division modulation of 4 PSK nnd tran6mitted on 4 to 20 2~ ch~nnel,E; while ~DTV signals are carried on a single channel.
Another digital HDT~ sy6tem i6 provided in which HDTV ~ideo data col~lpressed to as small aB 1~ M~pt~ are transmitted on a 16 or 32 Q~ cignal through ground sta~ions.
Such a ~nown satellite system permits ~DT~ signals to be carried on one channel by ~ conve~tional m~nner, thus oCCUpyi~lg a band of frequencies e~ui~alent to same channels o~ ~TSC signals. This causes the corresponding ~TSC channel6 .

to be lmavail~L~le durin~ transmission of the ~DrV signal.
Also, the co~patibility between NTSC and HDTV ~eceivers or display~ is hardly concerned ~nd d~Lta e~p~Lnsion capability needed for matching a future advanced mode is utterly disregarded.
Suc:h a common terre~trial EDTV ~y6tem offers an HDTV
service on conventional 16 or 32 QAM ~ignals witho~t any modi~icl~-tio~L. In any an~logue l~r broQd~a6t 6ervice, there ar devel ope d a lut of si gna 1 at tenuati~Lg or shadow regions withirL its service area due to ~t~uctural ob6tacle8, geographical incorLvenience6, or ~ignal interference from a neighbo:r st~tiorL. When the TV ~ignal ~8 an ~nalogue ~orm, i can be intercepted more or le~s at such ~ignal atte~uat~rLg region6 alth~ugh its reproduced picture i6 low in qua~ity. lf TV ~ign~3.1 is a digital form, it carL rarely be reproduced at an acceptable level within the regions. This disadvantage is critica:lly hos~ile to the developme~t of any digital T~r system.
Th:Ls problem is cau6ed due to the fact th~t the cor.vent.ional modulation ~ystems such CAM arran8e the signal points at con~tant intervals. There have b~en no ~uch system~
that carLchange or modulate the arrangement of sigrLal points.

SUMMARY OF ~E INVE~TION
It is an object of the present invention, for solving the foregoing diEadvantage6, to provide a communication ~y6tem ELrr~nged for compatible u6e for both the existing ~TSC

-'--CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 ~.

and introducing HDTV broadcast ser~ices, particularly via satelli~e and also, for mirimizin~ signal a~tenuating or shadow region6 of its service area on the grounds.
A c ication sy6tem accordirg to the present invention intentionall~ varies signal poi~ts, wkich us~d to be disE)osed at uniform int~rvals, to perform the signal tr~nsmi2ision/reception For ex ple, if applied to a QAM
signal, the co unication system comprises twc major sectionEj: a trAn~mitter having a signal input circuit, a L~ ~odulstt)r circuit ~or produciDg m number6 o~ signal points, in a sig~al vector ~ield through modulation of a plurality of out-of-phase carrier wa~es using ar. input ~ignal supplied from the i~put circuit, and ~ transmitter circuit for transmil;ting ~ result~nt modulated ~ignal; and a receiver having ,~n input circuit for receiving the modu~ated signal, a demodlllstor circuit for demod~llating one-bit signal points of a 4~f carrier ~-ave, and an output circuit In operation, the input signal containi~g a firs~ ~ata strea~ of n values and a second data stream iE ied to the modulatlt)r clrcuit of the transmi~ter where a modified m-bit ~AM c~r~rier wa~e is produced representing m signal points in a vector f~eld The ~ signAl points are divided into n signal point ~roups to which the n v~lues Gf the first data stream are asEigned respect~vely. Also, d~ta of the second data stream are assigned to m~ sign~l puin~s or sub groups oi each signal point group Th~n, a resultant tr~ns~ission signal is transmitted from the tra~s~ltter circuit.

Similar~ly, ~ third data stream can ~e propagated.
At th~ p-bit demodulator circuit, p>m, of the receiver, the first data stream of the tran6mis~ion ~ignal is first de~oduli~ted through dividi~g ~ signal poi~ts in a signal s~ace diagram into u sign~l point groups. Then, the second . data stream is demodulated through assigning p/n value6 to p~ 8ign~1 points of each correspondin~ signal point group for recl:lnstruction of both the flrst and eecond data streams.
If the receiver is a-, P-n, the n si,~nal point groups are reclaim~d and assigned the n values for demodulatio~ ~nd reconstruction of the f irst d~t~ stream.
Upon receiving the snme transmission signal fro~ the transmitter, a recelver equipped with a large si~ed antenna and cap~ble of large-data ~odulation can r~produce both the 16 fir~t s:rld ~econd data stream~. A receiver e~uipped with a small ~i~ed antenna and capable of s~nall-dat~ modulQtion can reprodure the f irst data stream only. Accordingly, the compatibility o~ the signal tran6mis6ion 6ystem will ~e en~ured. When the first data ~tream is an NTSC TV sign&l or ZO iow freq.uency b~nd component of an HDTV ~ignal and the second data 6t:ream is a high frequency band component of the EDTV
sig~Ql, the small-data ~odulation receiver can reconstruct the NTSt''TV si~nal and the large-data ~odulation receiver can reconstruct the HDTV signal. As understood, Q digital ~TSC~HDl~ simuLtaneously bro~dcast service will be fe~sible using the compati~ility of the signal transmission sy~tem of the present lnvention.

CA 02226489 1998-03-17 ' ~
~ _.

More ~pecifically, the cQ~munication 5ystem of the present inventlDn co~pri6es: a transmitter h~ving a signal input cir~uit, a modulator circuit for producing m ~ignal polnt6, i~ a signal vector field through ~odulation of pluraliliy of out-of-pha~e carrier ~avefi u6ir~g an input 6ign~1 supplierl from the input, and a tr~n~mitter cirruit for tran6mit*ing a resulta~t modulated signal, in which the ~ain procedu.re incl~de~ r~ceiving an inp~t sign~l cQntaining a first data stream of n values and ~ second dat~ stre~m, dividi~ the m signal points of t~e 8ig~1 i~to n ~igual point group8, asBignir~g the n values of the fir~t data stream to the rL sig~al point groups respectively, aB8igning d~ta of tha second data strea~ to the signal point6 of each signal po.nt group r~spectively, and transmitting the re6ultant 1~ modulate~d 6ign~1; cnd a receiver having an input circuit for receivil~g the modulated ~ignal, a demodulator circuit for ~c~ .ti~g p signal points of a QA~ carrier wave, ~nd an output circuit~ in which the mcin procedure include6 dividing the p signal points 1nto n ~ignal point group~ latin~
Z0 t~e fir~.t data stre~ of which n val~e~ are assig~ed to the n ~ignu.l point groups respectively, and demodulating the second d~ta stream of which p~n values are assigned to p/n signal points of each signal point group respectively. For example!, a transmitter 1 produces a modified m-bit QAM 6ign~1 of which iirst, second, and third data ~treams, each rarrying n value!~, are assigned to relev~nt 6ign~1 point group6 with a modulcl.tor 4. The signal can be inter~epted and reproduced -CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 .. .!.. .

the first data 6trea~ only by a fir~t receiver 2S, both the ~ir~t an~d eecond data streams ~y a second receiver 33, ~nd ~ll the i~irst, second, and third streams by a third recelver 43.
~ ore ~articu}arly, a receiver capable of demodulation of n-bit data can reproduce n bits ~rom a multiple-bit modulated carrie~1Rave cnrrying un m-bit data wh~re m>n, thus allowing the comm~ c~tion ~ystem to have compati~ilitY and capability of future e~ten~ion. Al~o, a multi-level signal tran~mis~ion will be E~os~ible by shi~ting the signal points o~ r~AM so thnt a neares1; signal point to the origin po~nt of I-axis a~d Q-~xi~ coo:rdinates is ~paced ni from the origin where f i~ the distance oS the nearest point from each axi~ ~nd n i& more tha~
Accordingly, a compatible digital satellite broadcQ6t service $~r both the NTSC and ~DTV systems will be feasible when the first data stre~m carrie6 an NTSC 6ignal ~nd ths second data stream carries a differ2nce sig~l bet~een NTSC
and HDT~r. Hence, the capability of corresponding to an increase in the d~ta amount to be transmitted will be ensured. Also, at the ground, its service area will be incre~se~i while signal attenuating areas are decreased.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWIN~S
Fig. l is a sche~Ptic ~iew oP the entire arrangeme~t of a si~nal tra~s~i~6ion system showing ~ fir6t embodime~t of the pre6ent in~ention;

CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 "

Fi~. 2 i6 a block diagram of a transmitter of the first embodi~ent;
Fig. 3 is a vector diagram showing a transmission signal of the first e~bodiment;
Fi,s. 4 is ~ vector dia~r~n showin~ a trancmisE;ion signal of the f i rst embodimerlt;
Fig. 5 is a view ~howing a~ assignment of binary codes to sign,~l points &ccording to the f irst e~b~diment;
Fig. B i~ a view showing an assignment of binary codes to ~ignl~l point groups accordi~g to the f ~rst s ho~i~enf;
Fi~. 7 is a view showing ~n as~ig~ment of binary codes to signal poi~ts in each signal point grou~ according to the first e~bodiment;
Fig. 8 is a view showing another assignment of bin~ry codes to signal point groups and their signal poirLts according to the first embodiment;
Fi~. 9 i~ a view 6howing threshold value~ of the eignal point groups according to the first embodiment;
Fig. 10 is a vector diagram of a modified 1~ QAM signal of the first embodiment;
Fig. 11 is a graphic diagram showin~ the rel~tion between ante~na radi~s rz ~nd transmi~sion ene~gy ratio n accoraing to the f irst embodiment;
Fig. 12 is a view ~,owing the ~ignal points of a modified ~4 QAM signal of the first em~odiment;
Fig. 13 is a graphic diagr~m ~howi~g the relation betweeL. antenn~ radius r3 and transmission energy ratio n CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 ' '~

accordi.~g to the first embodiment;
Fig. 14 is a vector diagram showing signal poi~t groups and their signQl points of the modified 64 QAM signal of the f ~ r~t embodiment;
~ 5 Fig. 15 i~ an e~planatory view ~howing the relation between Al and A2 of th~ ~odifiad 64 CA~l si~nal of the first embodiment;
Fig. 16 i6 a graph d~agram showing the relation betwee~
antenna radius r2, r3 and tran~ission energy r~tio nl6, n~
respect.ively Qccording to the ~ir~t ~mbodi~ent Fig. 17 is a block diagram of a tigital trans~ittQr o~
the f ir~3t embodimellt;
Fi~. 18 is a 6ignal space diagram of a 4 PSK ~odulatsd ~ignal of the first embodiment;
~ig. 19 i~ a block diagram o~ a ~ir~t receivcr of the fir6t elE~bodiment;
~ iB. 20 is a signal space diagram of a 4 PS~ modulated signal of th~ flr~t e~bodime~t;
Fig. 21 is a block diagra~ of a 6econd receiver of the first el~bodiment;
Fig. 22 i~ ~ vector diagra~ of a modified 16 QA~ signal of the ~irst embodi~ent;
Fig. 23 is a vector diagram of a modifisd 64 QAM signal of the :e irst embodiment;
~ig. 24 is n flow chnrt showing an actio~ of the fir~t embodimenl;
Figs. 25(a) and 25(b) are vector diagrams s~owin~ an 8 CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 and 8 16 QAM signal of the first embodiment re~pectively;
Fi~. 26 is a block diagrem of a third receiver of the f i r 6 t e~odiment;
~ ig. 27 is a ~iew 6ho~ing ~ignal points of the modified 64 qAM !~ignal of the fir~t embodiment;
Fig. 28 ic a flow chart showing another action of the first embodi~en';
Fig. 29 is a schem~tic ~iew o~ the entire arr~nge~ent o~
a signal trane~i6sion system showing a thlrd embodiment of the pre~sent invention;
Fi~. ~0 i6 ~ bloc~ diagrsm of a f~rs~t video encoder of the third embodiment Fig . 31 is a blo~ diagram of a fir~t ~Jideo decoder of the third embodiment Fi,g. 32 i~ a block diagra~ of a ~econd video decoder ~f the third embodiment;
Fi,g. 33 i~ a block diagram of a third video decoder o~
the third embodime~t;
Fi,g. 34 is an espl~natory ~iew ~howing a time multipllE~xing nf D1, Dz, and D3 ei~nals ~ccording to the third embodiment;
Fi,g. 35 ie an e~planatory vi~w sho~-ing al~uther time multiple~ing of the D1, Dz, and D3 signals according to the third e~nbodiment;
Fig. 36 i9 an explan~tory view 6howing a further time multipl~axing u~ the D1, D2, ~nd D3 signal6 according to the third el~bodiment;

_ CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 Fi~. 37 is a schematic view of the entire arra~ge~ent of a signal trQnsmission system ~howi~g a fourth embodLment of the ~relsent i~vention;
Fi~g. 38 is a ~ector diagr~m of B modified 16 QAM 6ignal of the third embodime~t;
Fig. 39 is a vector di~gra~ of the ~odified 16 QAM
6ignal of the third embodiment;
Fig. 40 i~ a vector diagram of a modifled 64 QAM signa of the third embodiment;
Fil5. 41 is a diagr~m of asiig lent of data component~ on a time base ~ccording to th~ third embodiment;
Fig. 42 i8 a diagram of ~s~ignment of data c- on~ts on a time b~se in TDMA action accordin~ tD the ~ird embodiment;
Fig. 43 is a block diagr~m of a carrier reproducing circuit o~ the third embodiment;
Fi,~. 44 i~ a diagram 6ho~ing the principle of carrier wave reproduction according to the third embodiment;
Fi,g. 45 is a block diagram of a carrier reproducing circuit for reverse modulation of the third embodiment;
Fi,~. 46 is a diagram showing an assignment of ~ignal points ~f the 16 QAM signal of the third embodiment;
Fi,g. 47 is a diagr~m showing a~ assignment of aignal poin~s ~of the 6~ QAM signal of the third embodiment;
Fig. 48 is a block diagram of a carrier reproducing circuSt for 16x ~ultipLication of t~ third embodimPnt;
Fig. 49 is an explan~tory view showing a time multipllaxing of Dyl, D~l, Dy2l D~, Dv3~ and D~ signals according 'CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 to the third ~mbodiment;
Fig~ 50 io an explqnatory view showi~g a TD~A time multipl~ing of ~, D~l. D~2, D~, D~, and D~ signals ~cc~rding to the third embGdiment;
Fig. 51 is A~ eYplanatory view showi~g another T~MA time multipl~xing of the Dyl~ D~1. ~ , D~ ~3, and ~ signal6 accordi.~lg to the third embodiment;
Fi~. 52 i5 ~ diagram showlng a 6ignaL interference region 'Ln a known tran4mi~6ion method arcording ~o the fourth emb od iment;
Fi~. 53 i~ a diagr~m showing 6ignal interference region~
in a mu:Lti-levei ~ignal transmi~sion ~ethod according to the fourth embodiment;
Fig. 54 is a diagram 6howi.ng signal attenua~ing regions in the known tra~SmiBSiOn method accordi~g to the fourth embodim~3nt;
Fig. 55 is a diagra~ showing signal attenuating ret~on6 i~ the Irulti-level signal tr~smis~ion method according to the fourth embodim6nt;
Fig. 56 is a diagram showi~g a 6ign~1 interference region between two digital TV ~tation~ ~ccording to the fourth embodiment;
Fig. 57 i6 a diagram Bhowing an a~sign~ent of signal poiDts of a nodified 4 AS~ signal of the fifth embodiment Fi,~. 58 is a diagram showing another assign~ent of ~ignal puints of the modified 4 ASK signal Gf the fif th embodinlent;
. 12 ~ 02226489 1998-03-17 Fi~s. 59(a~ and 59(b) are dLagram~ showiDg as~ignment of signal ~oints of the modi~ied 4 ASK sign~l of the fifth embodiment;
Fi~. 60 is a diagram showing a~other assignme~t of signal l?oints of the ~odified 4 AsE signal af the fifth embodi~ent when the C~' rate i~ lo~;
Fil~ . 61 i8 a block diagram of a ~ran~mitter of the fifth embodime~t;
Figs. 6Z(a) and 6~b) ~re diQgrQm~ showing frequency distribution proflle6 of an AS~ modulated 6ign~1 of the fifth . ho~ime~nt;
Fig. 63 i~ a bloc~ diagram of a receiver of the fifth emhn~im~ t:

Fig. 64 is a block diagram of a video ~ignal tra~i+ter of the iEifth embodiment;
Fip. 65 is a block diagram of a TV receiver of the flfth .ho~i nt;
Fig. 66 is a block diagram of another ~V receiver of the fifth embodime~t;
Fi~:. 67 is a block diagram of a ~tellite-to-~round ~l receiver~ of the fifth embodiment;
Fig. ~8 is a di~gram showing an as~ignment of ~ign~l points clf an 8 ASK 6ign~1 of the fifth emhodiment;
Fig. 69 is a block diagra~ OI a ~-ideo encoder of the fifth embodiment;
Fig. 70 i~ a block di~gr~m of a vid~o encoder of the fifth el~bodiment co~taining one d~vider circuit;

~ J ~ ; E~-8;CA O2226489 l998-03-l7 ., Fig. 71 i~ a block diagram nf a video decoder of the fifth e~bodiment;
Fig. 72 is a block diagram of a videc, decoder OT the fifth 6~mbodiment containing one mixer circuit;
Fig. 73 is a diagram showing a time assignment of data.
componelnt6 of a transmission signal according to the fifth embodi~lent;
Fig. 74(a) is a block diagram of a v~deo decoder of the f i f th e~bodiment;
Fig. 74~b) is a diagram ~howing another time a6si~nment of data. components of the transmi~sion ~ignal accordin~ to the fifth embodiment;
Fig. 75 is a diagram ~howing a time a~signment of data cn on~nts of a transmi8sion ~i~nal accordi~ to ~he fifth.
ambodi~ent;
Fi~. 76 i~ a diagra~ showing a time assignment of data co~on~nts of a tran6mis6ion ~ignal accordi~g to t~e fifth embodiment;
Fip. 77 i8 a diagram showing a ti~e assignment of data Zo componel~ts of a transmi66ion signal according to the fifth embodiment;
~ il3. 78 i~ a block diagram of a video decoder of the fifth emb~diment;
~ ig. 79 is a diagram 6howi~ a time assignment of data components of a three-level transmission signal according to the fifth embodiment;
Fi~g. 80 i6 a bloch diagram of another video decoder of .. .A

c 1 ~ FCA 02226489 l998-03-l7 the fif~h embodiment;
Fig. 8i i6 a diagra~ ~howing a time asslg~ment of data compone~t~ Df Q tran~mission signal according ta the fifth embodiment;
Fi~. 82 i6 a block diagram of a video decoder for ~1 signsl of the ~i~th embodiment;

Fig. 83 is a graphic di~gram ~howing the relation between frequency and time of ~ frequency ~odulated 6ignal sccording to the fifth em~odi~ent;
Fi~. 84 is a block di~gram of a magnetic record~playbac~
apparatl~6 of the fifth embodiment;
Fig. 85 is a graphic diagram ~howing the relstion between C/N and level ~ccordirlg to the second embodime~t;
Fig. ~6 is a graphic diagram showing the rel~tion between C~N and transmission di6tance according to the second embodiment;
~ ig. 87 i8 ~ block diagram of a tran8miS~ion ~f the ~econd embodiment;

Fig. 88 i~ a ~l~ck diagram of a receiver of the second embodiment;
Fig. 89 is a grQphic diagram ~howing ~he relation between C~ and error rate sccording to the 6econd embodiment;
Fi~. 90 is ~ diagrem showing signal attenuating region6 in the three - level t~ansmiB8ion of the ~ifth e~bodiment;
Fig. 91 is a diagram showing si~nal atte~uatin~ regions in the :gou~-~evel transmission of a si~th embodiment;

- 'CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 ~ - ~~-Fig. 92 i~ a diagram showing the four-level tr~nsmission of the ~ ixth embodiment;
Fig. ~3 is a block diagr~m of a divider of the sixth embodiml3nt;
Fi~z. ~4 i8 a ~lock di~gram of a mixer of the sixth embodiment;
Fig. 95 is a diagram showing another four-level t r ~nsmi l3Si on o f the si~th embodiment;
Fig. 9~ 1B a vi~w of sign~l propagation of a ~Lown digital l~r ~roadeust sy6tam;
Fig. ~7 is a view of signal propagatiorL of a digital TV
broad~it system according to the si~th embo~; ~nt;

Fig. 98 i8 R di~gram showi~ a four-leve1 transmis~ion of the ~i~th embodiment;
1S Fi~. 9~ iq a vector diagram of a 16 SRQAM signal of the third embodiment;
Fi,g. lOO is ~L vector diagram of a 32 S~QAM signal of the third elLbodiment;
Fi,g. lOl is a graphic di~gram showin~ the relation between C/N fLnd error rate accordirL~ to the third e~bodiment;
Fig. 102 Is a graphic diagram showing the relation between.C/~ and errur rate aecording to the third e~bodiment;
Fig. 103 is a ~raphic diagram showing tne relation between shift distance n and C/N needed for tr~Lsmission accordi.ng to the third embodi~ent;
Fi.~. 104 is a graphir diagram showing the relation between shift distance n and C~N needed for transmission lB

~ ~7~~ ~ ~5 ~' - 'rCA 02226489 l998-03-l7 -'~

according to the thir~ embodi~ent;
Fiir. 105 is a graphic diagram show~ng the relation between signal level ~nd di6tance fro~ a tran~mitter antenna in terrestrial broad~ast 6ervice according to the third embodi~ent;
Fi~. 106 is a di~gram showing a s~rvice area of the 3Z
SRQAM 9ignal of the third embodiment;
Fig. iO7 is a diagram ~howing a 6ervice area of the 32 SR~AM sig~al of the th ~d embodi~ent;
Fig; 10B i6 a diagram showing a ~requencr dislribution profile of a TV 8ignal o~ the third em~o~iment;
Fi~. 109 is a diagram showing a time ~s~ignment of the TV ~i~nal of the third embodi~ent;
Fig. 110 is a diagram showing a principle of C-CDM of the third embodiment;
Fig. 111 i8 a view showing ~n as6ignment of code~
accordin.g to the th_rd embodiment;
Fig. 11~ i~ a ~iew showing an as6ignment of an e~tended 3~ Q~M according to the third embodiment;
Fig. 113 i6 a view 6howing a frequency assignment of a modulati,on signal according to the f if th embodiment;
Fig. 114 is a block diagram showi~g a magnetic recording/piayback apparatus according tc the fiith embodiment;
Fig. 1~5 is a block diagram showing a tran6mitterlreceiver of a portable telephone ~ccording to the eighth embcdiment;

~ CA 02226489 1998-03-17 Fig. 1~ is a block dia~.am showin~ ba~e 6tations acc~rding to the elgkth embodiment;
Fig. 117 is a view illustr~ting com~-mication capacities and tra~fic distributio~ of a conventional system;
5Fig. 118 is a view illustrating com~unication capacities and traXfic distri~ution ~ccording to the eig~th embodiment;
Fig. ll9(a) ~ 6 ~ diagram sho~-ing a time 610t a6sign~ent of a co~ventional system;
Fig. ll9(b3 is a dtagram showing a time slot assiGnment accordi~g to the ~ighth embodi~ent;
Fig. 120~a~ i6 a diagram showing a time slot as~ignment o~ a collvention~1 ~DMA system;
Fip,. 120(b) i~ a dia~ra~ showing ~ time slot ~signment accordillg to a TD~A system of the eighth em~odiment;
15Fig. 121 is a bloc~ diagram showin~ a one-lcvel ~ran~mitter/receiver according to the eight~ embodiment;
Fil~. 122 is a block di~gram showing a two-level trancmitter/receiver according to the eighth embodime~t;
Fi~. 123 is a block diagra~ showing an OFDM type tr~nsmitter/~eceive~ accordi~g to the ninth embodiment;
Flg~ 124 is a vie~ illu~tr~ting a principle of the OFDM
system ~ccording to the ninth em~odiment;
Fi~. lZ5~a) is a view showi~g a . requency assignment of a modulation signal of a conventional system;
25Fig. 125(b) is a view showing a frequency assi~nment of a modul,~tion signal according to the ninth e~bodiment;
Fi~. 126(a) is a view showing a ~requency as~lgnment of c~o~FCA 02226489 l998-03-l7 ~

transl~ic~iOn signal of the ninth embodiment;
Fig'. 126(b) is ~ view showing a frequency assignment of receil~ing signal according to the ninth embodiment;
Fi~. 127 is ~ block diagram showing ~- 5 transmit;ter/rec~iver according to the n~nth embodiment;
Fi~. 128 is a block diagram showing a Trellis encodcr acc~rding tG the fifth embodime~t;
Fig. 129 is a view showing a ti~e assignment of effecti~e symbol periods ~nd guard interval~ according to the ninth embGdiment;
Fig. 130 is a graphic diagram s~owing a relation between C~N rate ~nd error r~te according to the ninth embodiment;
Fijg. 131 i~ a block dingram showing a magnetic recording~playback ~pparatu6 ~ccording to the ~ifth embodime~t;
Fi,g. 132 iB a view ~howing a recording ~orm~t Df track on the magnetic tape and a travelling of ~ head;
Fig. 133 is Q block diagram showing a tr~nsmil;ter/receiver according to the third embodi~ent;
Fi~. 134 i9 Q diagr~m showing a frequenry as6ignment of B conve~ltional ~rc~adca~;tlng;
Fig. 135 is a diagra~ showing n rel~tion bet~een servic~
~rea and picture quality in a three-level ~ignal trsnsmission system according to the third embodi~ent;
Fig. 136 is ~ diagrnm sho~ii~g a ~requency assignment in case th~ multi-level signal transmission ~ystem according to the third e~odiment is combined with an ~DM;

.v .- ; _ .:.- i..~~ c-~~~r-CA 02226489 1998-03-17 .~.. s _ . v Fi.g. 137 is a block diagram showing a trans~itter/receiver according to the third embodiment, in which Tre1lis encoding is adopted; a~d Fig. 138 i6 a block diagram ~howing a transmitterJreceive~ according to the ninth embodiment, in which a part of low frequency band s~.gn~l is trQnsmitted by OFDM.

DE'~AILEP DESCRIPTION OF I~R PREFERRED ~M~ODIM~YTS
Em~odl~Lent 1 On,e em~odiment of the present invention wiLl be described referrlDg to the relevant drawirgs.

Fig. 1 shows tne entire arrargement o~ a 6ignal transmi~sion ~ystem according to the prese~t invention. A
1~ tr~smitter 1 com~ri~es aDL input unit 2, a divider circuit 3, a modul.stor 4, ~nd a transmitter u~it 5. I~ ~ctlon, ~ach input multiple~ ~ignal is divided by the divider clrcuit 3 into three groups1 a first data stre~m D1, a seeond data stream D2, a third data ~tream D3, which are then modulated b~ the ~odulator 4 before transmitted from the transmitter unit 5. The modulated signal i6 sent up from an ~ntennal 6 through ar. uplink 7 to ~ ~tellite 10 where it i6 i~tercepted by an npli~k antenna 11 and amplified ~y a ~ranspo~der 12 before transmitted fro~ a downli~Lk antenn~ 13 toward~ the grourld.
The transmission signal is then sent down through three downlirlks 7-1, 32 and 41 to a first 23, a seco~d 33, srd a CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 '~

third re_eiver 43 respecti~rely. In the first receivcr 23, the signAl intercepted by an anLtenneL 22 is fed through a~ i~LpUt unit 24 to a demodulator 25 wh~re its first data strea~ only i6 demodulated, while the 6econd ~rLd third data streams are rLot recc~vered, be~ore transmitted ~urther ~rom aDL ~utpu' unit 26.
Similarly, the secoDLd receiver 33 allow8 the firYt a~d gecond data strea~s o~ the signal in~ercepted ~y an antenna 32 an~ fed f~om alL input ~Lit 34 to be de~Lodulated by a demodul~tor 35 and then, su~med by a sum~er 37 ~o a si~Lgle data str~am which i9 then transmitted further fro~ Bn output unit 36.
Thc~ thlrd receiver 43 allows all tbLe first, second, and third data streams of the sig~al irLterCepted ~y an anter~La 42 1~ and fed. from an input unit 44 to be de~odulated by a ~1?l o~ lator 45 aIld then, summed by a Bummer 47 to a sinLgle d~Lta stre~m which is then tran~mitted further from an output u~it 46.
As urLderstood, the three disc~ete receivers 23, 33, and 43 ha~e their respective de~odul~torb of di~fere~t chara~teristics such that their outputs dem~dulated fro~ ~he 6~me freque~Lcy ba~Ld signal of the traDLbmitter 1 contair. data of diffe~ert 6i~e8. More partic~larly, three different but compa~ible data car ~imu~taneously be carried on a ~ivcrL
freque~Lcy banLd signal to 2heir respective recei~er~. For ex&mple~, ~ach of t~ree, existing NTSC, HDTV, and super HDTV, digital 6ign&18 is divided into a low, ~ high, a~Ld a cuper ~ ' ' ~ ' ' ~'- ~'CA 02226489 1998-03-17 ' ~

high frequency band components which repre~ent the first, the second, and the third data stream re~pecti~ely. Accordingly, the three different TV signal~ can be transm}tted on a o~e-channel frequeucy band c~rrier for simult~neons rep-oduction of a me~ium, a high, a~d a super high reso~ution TV image re~ectively.
~ n 6ervice, ~he NTSC TV s~gnal is ~ntercepted by re~eiver acco~psnied with a s~all nnten~ f~r demodula~ion of a smal l -sized data, the EDTV signai is interce~ted by a receiver accomp~nied with a medium antenna for de~odulation of medium-sized data, and the super ~DT~ si~nal is i~t~rcepted by a receiver accompanied with a lar~e antenna for ~c~ 1ation of large-sized data. Also, as illustrated in Fig. 1, a digital NTSC T~ si~nal eo~tainin~ only the ~irst ~ata stream for digital ~TSC TV broaucasting service is fed to a digital transmitter 51 wh~re lt is recei~ed by an input u~it 52 and modulated ~y a demodulator 54 before transmitted further fro~ a transmitter unit 55. ~he de~odulated signal i9 then serlt up from an antennal 56 through an uplirAk 57 to the 6atellit,e 10 which in turn tran~mits the s~me through a downlin]~ 58 to the first receiver 23 on the grou~d.
The~ first receiver 23 demodulates with its demodulator 25 the modulAted digital si~al supplied from the digital transmil;ter ~1 to the original first data stream ~ignal.
2~ Sl~ilar'y, the same modulated di~it~l signal can be intercept~d and demodulated by the second 33 or third receive~ 4Z to the ~}rst data stream or NTSC ~V signal. II1 L c~CA 02226489 1998 03 17 ~

~um~ary, the three discrete receiver~ 23, ~3, and 43 ~11 can interce~pt and process a digital 6ignal of the existing IV
~ystem for reproduction.
The arrangement of the ~ignal transmission sys~em will ~e described in more detail.
Fi.g. 2 is a block diagra~ of the transmitter 1, ln which an inpu.t signal is fed across the i~put unit 2 a~d di~ided ~y the di~ider circuit 3 into three digital eignal~ containing a first,, a second, and a third data stream respectively.
~ 10 A~,~uming th~t the input ~ignal is a video signal, it~
ln~ fre!quency band component is as~igned to the first dat,a stream, its high ~requency ~and compone~t to the sQcond data stream, its super-high freque~cy band compone~t ~o the third data st:ream. The three different frequency band signals are fed to a modulator input 61 of the modulator 4. Hore, a signal point modulating/chang~ng circuit 67 modulates or changes the posltions o~ the signal points according to ar.
e~ern~,lly giv~n ~ig~al. The mod~lator 4 i6 arranged for amplitu.lde modulation on two 9O~ out-of-phase carriers ~O re~pectively which are then 6ummed to a multiple QAM signal.
More specifically, the signal from the modulator input 61 is fed to both a ~ir~t 62 and a s~cond AM modulator 63. Also, a carrier wave of cos~2~ct) produced by a carrier generator 64 is directly fed to the first 4M modulator 62 and ~lso, to a 2~ ~J2 pha~e shifter 6~ where it is 90~ ~ifted in phase to a sin~2~f'ct) f~rm prior to transmit~ed to the ~econd AM

modulat.or 63. The two amplitude modulated si~nal6 from the ~ J _ , 1 ~;,, U. --. C~
~ ~CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 ~ ~-firc~ alld second ~ modulators 62, 63 ~re summed by a summer 65 to a tran~mission signal ~-hich is then transferred to the trans~itter unit ~ ~or output. The procedure i~ well ~n~wn and wil:l no ~urther be explained.
The Q~ 6ignal will no~ be described in ~ common 6~8 or 16 statc~ con~tellation referri~g to t~ firs* quadr~nt of a space d.iagram in Fig. 3. The output 6ig~al of the modulator 4 is e~xpres~d by a ~um uector of two, Acos2~fct aud Bcos~fct, vectors 81, 82 which represent the two 9O~-out-of-phase cllrriers respectively. ~hen the distal point of a ~um vector ~rom the ~ero point represents a signal point, the 16 QAM sigDal ha~ 16 signal points determined by a combination of four hori~n~l amplitude value6 al, ~2~ a3. a4 and ~our vertical amplitude values bl, b2, b3, b4. The ~irst quadr~nt in Fig. 3 contains four signal points 83 at C~, 84 at C12. 85 at C22, and ~6 at C~.
Cl~ i6 a ~um vector of B vector O-a1 and a vector O-b and thLus, e~pressed ~s Cll alcos2~fet-b16in2~fct Acos~2~fct+d~J2).
It is now assumes that the distance betweer. O and al in the orthogonal coordi~&te6 of ~i~. 3 i~ Al, between ~1 and a2 is ~, between 0 and bl is Bl, and bet~een ~1 and b2 is Bz.
A6 shown i~ Fig. 4, the 16 6ign~1 points are allocated in a ve~tor cocrdin~te, in whi~h each point r~prese~t~
four-bit pattern th~s to allow tne trans~i66ion of ~our bit data pe!r period or time 61Ot.
Fi.g. 5 illustra~es a common as6i~nme~t Of 'Wo-~it _~ CA 02226489 1998-03-17 "~ t patterns to the 16 signal points.
When the distance between two adjacent signal points is great, lt will be identified by the r~ceiver with much ea~e.
Henoe, it i~ desired to sp~ce the signal point~ at greater intervals. If two particular sig~al p~ints are allocated near to each other, they are rarelY distinguished and error rate will be increased. Therefore, it is most preferred to have the signal points spaced at e~ual intervals a6 shown in Fig.
5, in which ~he 16 QAM si~nal is defined by A1-A2J2.
~he trans~itter 1 of the embo~ nt io arranged to divide an input digital signal into a first, a second, and a ~hird ~l~ta or bit stream. The 1~ sig~al points or groups of sig~al points are divided into four groups. Then, 4 two-bit patternls of th~ first data 6tream are a~signed to the four ~gnal point gro~ps respectiv~ly, as shown in Fig. 6. More particulnrly, when the two-bit patt~r~ of the first data stre~m ;s 11, one of fonr signal poin~s of the first slgnal point group ~1 in the first quadrant is selected depending on the conte~t of the sec~nd data stream for transmi8~ion.
Similarly, when 0-, one signal point of the second signal point ;vro~;p ~i2 in the second quadrant LB selected and transmitted. When ~0, one signal point of the third signal point group ~3 in the t~ir~ quadrant is trans~litted ~nd wh~n 10, one signal point of the fourth sij,nal point group 94 in the ~ourth quadrant is transmittcd. A1FO~ 4 two-bit patterns in the second data strea~ of the 1~ QAM signal, or e.~. 16 four-bit patterns in the second data str~am of a 64-state QAM

r-~ CA 02226489 1998-03-l7 ''~

signal, are assigned ~o four signal points or ~ub sig~al point g:['OUp5 of each of the four Bignal point groups 91, 92, 93, ~4 respeetively, as ~hown in Fig. 7. It should be under6t~0d that the assignment is sym~etrical between any two q~adranl;6. The assignment of the si~al points to the four groups 91, 92, 93, 94 ie dete~mined by priority to the two-bit dat~q of the first data strcam. AB the result, two-bit data of the fir6t data Rtream and two-bit dat~ of the second dat~ stream can be transmitted independently. A}~o, the fir6t data stream will be demodulated with the u~e of a c_ or 4 PSK rec:eiver having a given anten~ 6ensitivity. If the a~tenna sensitivity i6 higher, a modified type of the 16 QAM
recei~er of the present inve~tion will lntercept and d~od~ te ~oth t~e first and second data streQm ~ith equal success.
Fig. 8 shows an e~ample of the assignment of ~he ~irst and ~econd data stream6 in two-bit patterns.
When the low frequency b~nd component of an HDTV video signal i8 as~igned to the f-rs~ data 6tream and the high frequen,_y componert to the ~econd data stre~m, the 4 PSK
receive:r can produce ~n NTSC-level pictur~ from the first data stream and the 16- or 64-state QAM receiver c~n produce an ~DTV picture from a compo6ite reproductiorl sign~l of the fir~t a,:nd second d~t~ stream6.
Since the signal point~ are alloc~ted at ~qual intervals, there is developed in the 4 PSE receiver a threshold distance between the coordlnate a~es and the ~naded ~~ 'CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 area of the fir~t ~uadrant, AS show~ in Fig. 9. I~ the thre~ha]d distance is ~ , a PS~ signal ~a~in~ an amplitude of ~ will succe6sfully be intercepted. However, the amp~itud~ has to be increased to a threë times greater value 5 or 3~ for transmlssion of a 16 CA~ signal while the thresho]d dls~ance ~ being m~int~ined. More particularly, the energy for tr~nsm~tting the 16 Q~M sign~l is needed ~ine ti~es ~reater than th~t for ~ending the 4 PS~ signal. Also, when thl3 4 P~E signal is trans~itted in a 16 QA~ mode, energy 10 wafite wi.ll be high ~nd reprod~ction of a carrier signal will be troubllesome. Above ali, the energy ~vailab3Le for satelllte transmll;ting is not abundant but strictly limited to minim~m use ~ence, no large-energy-con8umin~ signal tran~mittlng system will be put into practiee ~ntil more energy for satellil~e tran6mission is available. It is e~pe~cted that a great nl~mber of the 4 PSK receivers are i~troduced into t~e market lls digital TV ~roadca~ting is soon in 6ervice. After introduction to the market, the 4 PSE receivers w111 hardly be shifted to higher sensitivity models because a signal ir~tercepting characteristic gap between the twn, old and new, models i~ high There~ore, the transmissior~ of the 4 PS~
signals m~s~ not ~e abandoned.
In thi~ respect, a new system is despera~ely needed for transmitting the signal polnt dPta of a qu~si 4 PSK 6ignal in Z5 the 16 ~AM mode with the use of less energy Other~-ise, the limitecLe~ergy at a satellite staSion will degrade the entire transmission system.

CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 ~ ~~ ~ ~~

The present invention resides in a multi~le sign~l level arra~gement in which the four signal po-nt groups 91, 92, 93 94 are allocated at a gre&ter di~tance from each other, as shown i.n Fig lO, for minimizin~ the energy con6umption required for 16 QAM modulation o~ quasi 4 PSK signals.
For clearin~ ~he relation between the signal receiving 6ensiti~ity and the tr~nsmitting energy, the arrangement of the digi.tal transmitter 51 and the fir~t receiver 23 will be deR~rib~d in ~ore detail referring to Fig. 1.
Both the digital tran6mitter 51 and the first receiver ~3 are for~ed of known types for ~ata tran6mission cr video signal trans~i.~sion e.g. in TV broadcasting 6ervice. A~ sho~n in Fig. 17" the digital transmitter ~l is a 4 PS~ tran6mitter equivalent to the multiple-bit QAM transmitter 1, ~hown in Fi~. 2, without AM modulation capsbility. In operation, an input signQl i~ fed throug~ an i-~pu~ unit S2 ~o a ~odulator 54 wher~ it is divided ~y a modulator i~put 12; to two components. The two components are then tran~ferred to a first two - phu~e modulatcr circuit lZ2 for phaee ~odulation of a ~a6e carrier ~d OE 6econd two-ph~se modul~tor circuit 123 for ph~se modulation of a carrier which is g~- out of ph~se with th~3 base carrier respe~ti~-ely. Two output~ of the ~irs~
and secl3nd two-pha6s modul~tor circuits 122, 123 are then su~med b~- a su~mer 65 to a composite modulated signal which ~5 is further tra~smitted fro~ a tra~6mi.tter unit 55.
The resulta~t modulated signal is 6hown in the sp~ce di~gram of Fig. 18.

~~ ~ CA 02226489 1998-03-17 ' ~~ -~

It is know~ that the four signal poiuts are allocated at equal dListances fcr achievin~ opti~lum energy utilization.
~ig. 18 illustrutes ~n example where the four signal points 125, 12lB, 127, 128 represent 4 two-bit patterns, 11, ~1, 00, a~Ld lO respectively. It is al~o drsired for succes6ful data . .~ tra~6fer from the digital transmitter 51 to the first recelver 23 than the 4 PSR signal from the digit~l tra~Lsmitter 51 ha6 an amplitude of not le~s than a given level. More specifically, whe~ the mirLimum amplitude of the 4 PSK signal ~Leeded for tran5mis6ion from the digital tran6mi~ter 51 to the first receiver 23 of 4 PS~ mode, or the dist~nc-~ between 0 and al in Fig. 18 is ~ , the first roeei~er Z3 succes~fully intercept any 4 PSK 6i~nal haViDLg an amplitude of more than ~ ~
15The first receiver 23 i~ arranged to receive at its ~mall-d:iameter antenna 22 a desired or 4 PSE slgnal which is trQrLsmitted from the transmitter 1 or digital transmitter 51 re~pectively through the transponder 12 of the satell~te lO
a~d demodulAte ~t ~-ith the demodulator 24. In more particular, the first receiver 23 is substantially de~i~ned for in1t.erception of a digital T~ or dsta communications signal of 4 PSE or 2 PSK mode.
Fig. 19 is a block diagram of the fir~t receiver 23 in which an inpu~ signal received by th~ a~tenna 22 from the satellite 12 is fed through the input unit 24 to a carrier reprod~cing circuit 131 wher~ a carrier wave i~ d~moculuted and to a ~/2 phase ~hifter 132 where ~ 9O- ph~se c~rrier w~ve ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 02226489 l998-03-l7 . ~

i6 demoduiated. Also, two ~O~-out-of-phase components o~ the i~put signal ~re detected by a first 133 and a second phase detector circuit 134 respectivel~ ard transferred tG a first 136 ancL a ~econd discrimination~demodulation circuit 137 respectively. Two demodulated componBnts from their resp~ctive discrimination~d~.c~ulation circuits i36 and 137, which hllve separately been discrimi~ated at unlt~ of time 910t by ~ean~ of timing sig~als from a timing wave e~tracting ~ircuit 135, are fed t~ a first data stream reprcduci~g unit 10 232 where they are ~ummed to a first ~ata streQm 6ignal which ls then delivered a5 ~n output from the output un~t 26.

Thl~ input signal to the first receiver 23 ~ill now be e~plainld in more detail referring to the vector diagram of Fig. 20.. The 4 PSE signal received by the fir~* receiver 23 15 from the digital transmi~ter ~1 is expre66ed in an ide~l form without traromi~sion distortio~ and noi~e, usine four ~ignal point8 :L51, 152, 153, 154 6hown in Fig. 20.
In practicel the real four signal points appear in partscuLar e~tended ~reaE abo~t the ideal signal po8ition~
151, lEi2, 153, 154 respectively due to noise, amplitude distort.ion, and pha6e error developed during transmission. If one ~ig~al point i6 uniavorably displaced from it~ original PoBition, it will hardly he distinguished from it~ neigh~or signal point ~nd the error rate will thus he increased. As the error rate increases to a critical le~el, the reprod~lction o~ data becomes leBs accurate. ~'or enabling the data reproduction at a maxim-~m acceptable le~el of the error .. ~

_ CA 02226489 1998-03-17 ~~~ ~ ~~ ~
, r~te, the di6ta~ce between any two signal pointe should be far enough to be di6tirguished from each other. If the di~nce i6 lA~, the sig~al Po~nt 151 of a 4 PS~ sign~l ~t clo6e t.o a critical error level ha~ to stay in a firYt discriminating ar~a l~S denoted by the hatchin~ of Fig. 20 and determined by ¦O-a~¦2 ~ and ¦O-b~¦~A~. This allow~ the eignal transmiosion system to reproduce carrier waves and thus, ~emodulate a wanted signal. When the minimum radius of the a~ten~a 22 is 6et to rQ, the transmis~ion ~ignal of more thau a given level ean be inte~cepted by any receiver o~ the ~y6tem. The amplitude of a 4 PSE signal of the digltal trAn~mitter 51 show~ ~ Fig. 1~ is minLm~m at ~ an~ thus, th~ minimum ampli~ude A~ of a 4 PS~ ~ignal to be receiv~d by the fir6t rece-ver Z3 i6 determi~ed equal to ~ . As the re6ult, tne first receiver 23 can 1ntercept and demodulnte the 4 ]PS~ signal from the digit~l trans~itter ~1 at the maximum accept~ble level of the error rate when the radius of the ~nt~nna 22 i~ more th~n rO. If the tran6~i6sion ~igna~ is of modified 16- or 64-~tate QAM mode, the first- receiver Z3 mny fi.~nd difficult io reproduce its carrier wave. ~or compensatiur., the si~nal pointc are increased to eigh~ which are allocated a~ angles of (~f4+n~/2) a8 ~ho~n in Fig. 25(a) and il;5 carrier wave will be reproduced by a 16~
multip~icatio~ technique. A1BO, if t~e sig~al points are a6signe~d to ~6 locations at a~gle~ of n~/8 as 6hown in F'ig.
25(b), th~ carrier o~ a qua~i 4 PS~ mode 16 QAM modulated eignal can be ~eproduced with the carrier reproducin~ cir~uit F ~ CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 131 which is mGdi~ied for performing 16~ ~requ~ncy multipl.i.cati~n. At the time, the si~nal po}nt6 in the trun~it:ter 1 should be ~rranged to satisfy Al/(AllA2)=~an(~
He:re, a ca6e of receiving a QPS~ signal wlll be co~idered. Simllarly to the msnner per~ormed by the sign~l point modulati~g~changing circuit 67 in the transmitter shown in Fig. 2, it i~ Also pos~l~le to ~odulate the positions of the sig:nal points of the QPS~ 6ignal show~ in Fig. 18 10 (~mplltude~odulation, pul~e--modulation, or the like). In this case, the signal point demodulating unit 138 in the first receiVer 23 de~odulates the po6ition modulated or pOsitio:~1 c~anged 6ignal. The demod~lated signal i~ o~tputted together with the first data stream Th,E~ 16 PS~ signal of the transmitter 1 will now be e~plain~d referring to the vector diagr~m o~ ~ig. ~. When the hcrizontal vector dictance A1 of the signal point 83 is greater than ~ of the minimum amplitude of the 4 PSK signal of the cl.igital tran6mitter 51, the f~ur ~ignal points 83, 84, 20 85, 86 iin the first quadrant of ~i~. 9 stay i~ the ~haded or flrst 4 PS~ signal re~eivable area 87. When received by the first r~ceiver 23, the four points of th~ signal appear in the fir3t discriminating are~ of the vector field shown in Fi~. 20. He~ce, any of the ~ignal point~ 83, 84, 8~, 86 of 25 Fig. 9 cen be translated into the signal level 151 of Fig. 20 by the :Eirst receiver 23 so that the two-bit p~ttern of 11 is a~signed to a corresponding time slot. The two-bit pattern _ CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 ~~

of 11 ils ident-cal to ll of the firs~ signa1 point group 91 or fir6t data stream of a signa~ fro~ the transmitter l.
Egually, the first data 6traam will be reproduced at the 6econd, third, or fourth quadrant. A~ the result, the ~tr~t receive:r 23 reprod~ce~ two-bit data o~ the first data stream out of the plurality of data ~treams in a lff-, 3Z-, or 64-state C~M ~ignal trancmitted fro~ t~e transmitter 1~ The second i~nd third data streAms are contain~d in four seg~ent6 of the Isignal point group 91 and thui, will not affect on the demoduli~Ltion of the fir~t da~a stream. ~hey may however affect the repro~uCticn of a carrier w~ve and arL adjustment, describ,ed later, will ~e needed.
If the transponder of a ~atellite suppl es a~ ~b~ n~e of enerl~Lr, the forgoing techniq~e of 16 to 64-state QAM mode tran~mi~sion will be feasible. ~owever, the tran6ponder o~
~he satellite n ~ny existing satellite transmis~ion system iB strictly limited in the power supply due to it6 comp~ct BiZe and the capability of solar batteries. If the transponder or satellite is increased in 6ize t~us weight, Z0 its lau~nching co~t wi11 soar. This disadvantage will rarely be elimin~ted by traditional technique~ unless the CQst of launchi.ng a sQtellite r~cket is raduced to a considerable level. I~ the existlng system, a common c_ i cations satelli.te provides as l~w as 20 W of power supply and a comm~n ~r~adcast satellite offers 100 W to 200 W at ~est. For transmLssion of such a 4 P8~ sig~al in the symmetrical 16-state ~;~M mode a6 shown in ~ig. 9, the minimum ~ignal point '~~ CA 02226489 1998-03-17 , .

dis~ancl3 i~ needed 3~ as the 15 QQM amp}itude i6 e~pres6ed ~y 2A1=~L2. Th~s, ~he energy needed for the purpose is ni~e time~ greater tha~ that for tran8mis6ion of a CO~OIl 4 PSK
signal, in order tc maint~in compatibility. Alfio, any conventional satellite tra~sporder can hardly pro-~ide a power for ena~ling 6ucA Q sma11 ~ntenna of the 4 PSE firgt receiver to i~tercept a tr~smitted fiignQl therefro~. For c~ample, in the e~isting 40W system~ 360W iB needed for ~pprop~iate signal l;ransmis6ion and wiil be unrealistic in the re~pect of c06t.
It would be ~nder stood th~t the symmetrical sign~l state C~ tech~ique is most effecti~-e when ~e ruceiver~
equipped with the same ~ized antennas are employad correspondi~ to a given transmitting power. A~other novel 1~ techniqlle will howevar be preferred ~or use with the receiver6 equipped with different ~i~ed anten~as.
In more detail~ whiLe the 4 PSE signal can be intercepted by a ccmmon low C08t receiver sy~tem having a small a~tenn~, the 16 QAM signal is intended to be recelved by a ]:ligh cost, high qu~lity, mul~iple-bit modulatin~
receiver sy~tem with a medium or large 6ized antenna which is desi~ne~ for pro~iding hi~hly valuable 6ervices, e.g. ~TV
entertaiI~ent6, to ~ p~rticular per~on ~ho invest6 more money. This allows both 4 PSK an~ 16 QAM 6ign~16, if dasired, ~5 with a 54 ~MA, to be tr~nsmitted siml~ltaneously with the help of a s~lall i~cres~e in the tran~mitting power.
For example, the transmitti~g power can be mQintained ~ 0 2226489 1998 03-17 ., low when the 6igna} points ~re alloc~ted at Al= A2 as ~hown iDL Fig. 10. The amplitude A(4) for trarLsmi~sion of 4 PSR data is e~pr~66ed by a vector 86 equivalent to a sq~are root of (A~A2 ) Z~ Bl+B2) 2, ThLen ~
~ A ( 4 ) ¦ 2=A12+B12--4~2~A~O~2A~O2 ¦ A ( 16 ~ ~ ~ ( A~+~2 ) ~ ( FL1~B2 ) 4ATO 4ATO TO
¦ A ~ 1 6 ) ¦ ~ ¦ A ( 4 ) ¦ = 2 Ac.cordingly, the 16 QAM ~ignal c~n be tran6mitted at a two timLe~ greater amplitude and a four times greater tran~itting energy than those rLeeded for the 4 PS~ signal.
A modified 16 CAM signal according to the pre6enLt invention wi11 not be demod~Llated by a com~on receiver de6igned for symmetrical, equally di6taDLced signal point ~AM. However, it ca~L be dem~d~lated wlth the Becond receiYer 33 when ~wo threshold Al and A2 are predetermined to ap~ropr1 at~ values .
~t Fig. 10, the minimum distQnce between two ~ignal poirLts Ln the fi~:st se~ment of the sigrLal point group 91 i6 Al arLd A2~2Al :i8 e~tabli~hed aS compared with the di~tance 2Al of 4 PSK. T~Len, as Al=~, the distance becomes 1/2. Thi~ explains that t]:le signal receiving ~ensitivity has to be two times grePter. f~r the s~Le error r~ ~e ~nd four time6 greater for the same sigrLal level. For havirLg a four ti~es greater value of sensitivity, the r~dius r2 of the a~Lter~a 32 of the secorLd receiv~r 33 has to be two times grea~er than the radius rl of the an.ten~a Z2 of ~he first receiver 23 thu6 satisf~Tirlg rz~2rl. For example, the antenna ~2 of the seco~d receiver 33 i6 6~ cm diameter when the anter~a 2Z if the first receiver _ CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 ~~

23 i~ 3G cm. In this manner, t~Le secorLd ~ata stre~m representing the high frequerLcy component of an HD~Y will b carried orL a ~ign~l chan~Lel arLd demodulated successfully. As the second receiver 33 intercept~ the second datQ ~tream or a hi~her data ~ignal, it6 owner can enjoy a return of high inve~tme~Lt Eence, the sscond receiver 33 of a ~Li~h price m~y . .
be uccepted. A~ the minimum energy for tr&~L~miesio~L of 4 PS~
dQta i8 predetermined, the r~tio nl6 of modified 1~ AP~E
tran6~i'tting energy to 4 PSK trans~itting energy will be calculat.ed to the aDLtenna radius r2 of the second receiver 33 using a ratio between Al arLd ~ ~hown in ~ig. 10.
In particular, n16 ie~ expre~sed by ((Al+A2)/4)2 W~LiCh iB
the ~inimum energy for tran~mi~sio~ of 4 PSK data. As the ~ignalE~oint distance suited for m~diiied 16 QAM irLter~ept~on 15 i6 A2, f;,he 6ignal point dist~ce ~or 4 PSE i~3Ltorceptic~
2Al, and the ~ignal point dis~ance rntio is 4/2Al, the anter~La radi~ r2 is determined a~ showrL iDL ~ig. li, i~L WhiCkL
the curve lO1 represent6 the relation between t~Le transmittin~ energy ratio nl6 anLd the radius r2 ~f the auter~a 22 of the ~ecan~ receiver 23.
Al~o, the point LO2 lndicates tr~n6mi6fiion of co on 16 QAM at the ~qual di~tance signal 6tate mode where the tran~mitting energy is nine ti~Lee ~re~ter and thus wlll no ~ore be practic~l. A6 apparent from the graph oi' Fig. 11, the antenna r~diu~ r2 of the 6econd receiver 23 can~Lot be reduced further even if nl6 ifi i~creased more than 5 timefi.
The transmitting erLergy at the ~atellite is limited to .

~=~-~CA 02226489 l99X-03-l7 a small value and thu6, nl6 preferably stays not more t~n 5 time~ the value, as denoted by the hatrhing of Fig. 11. Ths p~int l04 within the hatching area 103 indicates, for ex~mple, that the antenna radius r2 oi A two times greater value iE; matched with a 4~ vrlue of the tran6mitting energy.
Al~o, the point 105 re~resents that the transmiF.sion enerey sho~ld be doubled when r, is about 5~ greater. Those value~
are all w~thir. a fea6ible range.
Th~s value of nl6 uot greAter than 5~ value i~. e~pres~ed using A~ ~nd A2 a~:
n~ Al+A2)/Al~2' 5 ~ence, l~51.23Al.
If the distance between ~y two signal point group segment~ shown in ~ig. 1~ i8 2A(4) and the maximum amplitude 15 i~ 2~(16), A~4) and A(l~)-A~4) ~re proportional to Al and A2 re~pect.L.vely. Hence, ~A(l6))~5(A(14))2 is esta~ he~.
Tho nction of a modified 64 ASPE tran~mis6l0n will be describl3d a5 the third receiver 43 can perform 64-state QAM
demodul~tion.
Fi~.m 12 is a vector diagra~ in which each signal point group segment contains 16 sig~al poi~ts ~s compared with 4 61gna]. points of Fig. 10. The first signal poir,t group ~egment 91 in Fig 12 ha~ a 4~4 matri~ of 16 signal point~.
allocat~d at equai interval~ ludi~g the poi~t 170. Fcr providi:~g compatibility wlth 4 PS~, Al> ~ has to be sati6fied. I~ the radius of the ante~a 42 of the third receiver 43 is I'3 ar,d the transmittir,g energy is n~, the ... ~

~ t ~G~CA 02226489 l998 03 equ~tio,n is e~pre~sed as:
r3'~ = {6Z/~n~ rl2 Thi6 rel~tion hetwee~ r3 and n of a 64 ~ signal is hlso shown in the graphic representation of Fig. 13.
It is u~Lder stood that the signal point as6ignment showrL
in Fig. 12 allows the second receiver 33 to demodulate oIllY
~wo-bit patterns of 4 PSK dat~. Hence, it i~ desired for having compatibility betweer, the fir~t, secen~, ~nd th-rd receiver~ that the seco~d recei~r 3~ is arranged cap~Lble of ~emo~ atin~ a mu~ified 15 CAM form from the 64 QAM modulated sig~al.
Th.le compatibility betwee~ the three discrete re~eivers can be implemented by thr~e-level grouping of signal points, as illu~trated in Fig. 14. The description will be made 1~ referring to the first quadr~Lt i~ which t~Le first signal point group ~egment 91 repre~ents the two-bit pattern 11 of the f ir~6t data stream.
In partic~lar, a first ~ 6egment 181 in the first ~ignal p~int group ~egment 91 i6 assi6~ed the two-bit pattern 11 of t~Le second dat~ stream. Equally, Q SeCODLd 182, a thlrd 183, an.d a fourth sub segmen~ 184 are a~signed 01, 00, and 10 of the same respeetively. This aBsigr~ent i6 identical to t~Lat shown in Fig. 7.
The signal point allocatio~ oi the third data stream will nclw be e~plained referrirLg to the vector diagram of Fig.
15 whic:h shows the ~ir6t quadrant. As showlL, the ~our sign~l points 201, 205, 209, 213 represent th~ two-bit p~ttern of CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 11, the signal poin~s 2~2, 206, 210, Z14 represent Ol, the signal poi~$e 203, 207s 211, 215 represent 00, and slgnal Points 204, 208, 2~2, 216 represent lO. hccordingly, t~e two-bit patterns of the third data strea~ can be trans~itted 5 6eparately of the first and ~econd data ~treams. In other ~ords, f;wo-bil data Gf the thre~ different signal levels can be trAn!imittQd re6pectively.

A~ understo~d, the present invention permits not only tr~s~it3sion of six-bit data but also interception of three, two-bit, ~our-bit, ~nd ~i~-bit, dif ~erent bit length d~ta with t;heir respect1ve receivers while the signal co~pati~ility remain~ bet~een thrce levels.
The signal point alloc~tion for providing compatibility bet,~een the three levels will be de~cribed.
15As shown in Fig. 15, A12 ~ is es~entlal ~or allowing the iirbt receiver 23 to receive the first data stream.
It iB n~eded to 6pace any two 6ignal points from each other b~such a distan~e that the s~b segme~t signal point~, e.g. 182, 183, 184, of the 6eco~d d~ta s~ream shown in Fig.
2015 can be di6ti~guished from the ~ignal po nt 91 s~ own in Fig. lO.
Fig. 15 6hows that they are spaced by 2~3A2. ln thi6 case, the di~tance between the two ~ignal points 201 and 202 in the .eirst sub 6egment 181 i9 A~/6. The transmitting energy needed l.or signal intercepti~n with the third receiver 43 is now calculated. If the rPdiu~ of ~he antenna 32 i~ r3 And the needed t;ransmitti~g energy i6 n~ ti~es the 4 PSR transmitti~g 3~

CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 ~' ~ ~
' energy, the e~uation is e~pre6sed as:
r3'~=(12r1)2J(r~
This relation iS also de~oted by thP c~rve 211 in ~i~. 16.
~or e~ple, if the transmitti~g energy i~ 6 or 9 times greater th~ that for 4 PSE tr~n6mission at the point 223 or 222, the antenna 3Z ha~ing a radius of 8~ or 6~ v~tue respectively can intercept the fir~t, seco~d, and third data stre~ms for demodulation. A~ the signal ~oi~t di6tance of the second data stream is clo~P to 2/3A2, the relatlon between r and r2.is e~pressed by:
r2~'=(3rl)~/(n-1) Therefore, the antenna 32 of the ~econd receiver 33 has ~o be a little bit increased in radiu~ as denoted by the curve 2Z3.
A~ u~der6to~d, while the first and ~econ~ d~ta streams are trarlsmitted trough a traditional satel}ite which provides a small sienal tr~ns~ittiug energy, the third data 8tream c~n also be transmitted through a future ~atellite which pro~ide~
a 2reater 6ignal transmitti~g energy without interrupting the Act?o~ of the fir6t ~nd second receivers 23, 33 or wi~-h no ZO need of modification of the same and thus, both the comp~tibility and the advancement ~ill highly be ensured.
The signal receiving action of t~e cecond receiver 3~
will first be described. As compared with the fir6t receiver 23 arranged for interception with a ~m~ll r~dius rl antenna Qnd deml;)dulatior, o~ the 4 PSK modulated signal of the digital trans~ltter 51 or the ~irst data 6tre~m of the 6igr,~1 of the tr~nsmitter 1, the 6eco~d recei~-er 33 is adopted for CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 ' '~ ~~ ''-perfectly demodulating the 1~ signal ~tate tw~-bit data, shown in FiE. lO, or ~erond data stream of the lB ~AM sign~l from the transmitte~ 1. In total, four-bit data including al80 th~e fir~t datQ stream can be demodul~ted. Tho ratio between Al and ~ is however different in the IWt~
trans~it;ters. The two different data are loaded to a dem~dul~tion co~troller 231 of the second receiver 33, shown ln Fig. 21, whi~h in turn ~upplies their respective threshold value6 So the demodulating cir~uit for AM demodulation.
The bLoc~ ciiagram of the ~eco~d receiver 33 in Fig. 21 i8 Bimila~ in b~ic con~truction to that of the first receiver 23 sho~n in Fig. 19. The di~erence iB that the radius r~ of the ~nte~na 32 i~ greater than rl of the antenna 22. Thi!a allows the second receiver 33 to }dentify a signal 1~ compone~lt involving a smaller sign~l po_nt di6ta~ce. The de~odul~tor 35 of the second receiver 33 also contains a fir6t 232 and a second dàta 6tream reproducing unit 233 in additioll to the demodulatior. controller 231. There i8 provided a first di~crimination~reprodu~tion circuit 136 ~or A~ demodLulation of modifted lB QAM signals. As understood, each ca~;rier is Q four-bit signal haYing two, positive and negative~, threshold values about ~he zero level. As apparent from the~ vector diagram, of Fig. 22, the threshold ~alues are varied c3.epending on the transmitting energy of n transmitter since the ~ran~mitting ~ignal of the embodiment i~ a modified 16 QAM 3~gna}. When the reference threshold iB TH16, it iS
deter~itled by, a~ shown in ~i~. 22:

CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 ''~ ~~~ ~ ~- ---~a = rAl+A2~2)/(Al~A2) ~ het various data for demodulation including A1 and A2 or T~l5, anll the value m for multiple-~it ~odulation are also transmi~ted from the transmitter 1 ~8 c~rried in the first da~a strea~. The demodulalio~ contro~ler ~31 may be arranged for rec:overing 6UCh demodulation data through statiitic pr~ce~s of the received. signal.
A wa~- of determining the shift factor Al/A2 Will de6cribl~d with re~ere~ce to Fig. 26 A ch~nge of the 6hift factor A.1/A2 caUse~ a change of the threshold value. Increà6e of a difference of a v~lue of A1jA2 6et at the rec~iver ~ide from a value of AlJA2 ~et at the transmitter side will ir~creasl~ the error rate. Referring to ~ig. 26, the de~odullEL'ed ~ignal from the ~econd data ~trfam repr~d~cing lj unit ~3.3 may ~e fed back to the demodulation controller 231 to chanl~e the shift factor ~/A~ in a direction to increase the errl~r rate. By this arrangement, the third receiver 43 may not ~f_ o~ulate the shift factor AlJA2, so that the circ~it co~str~lction can be 6implified. Further, the tr~nsmitter maY
not tr~:lsmit the shift factor AlJA2, 60 that the trarsmi~sion c~pacity can be increased. This technique can be applied also to th~ ~iecond receiv~r 33.
The demodulation controller 231 has a memory 231a for storing therein different threshold valueEi (i.e., the ~hift f*ctors, the number of sig~al point~, the synchronization rules, e~c.) whi h correspond to different ch~nnels of TV

broadc~ . When receivin~ one of the chann~-ls again, t~e 'CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 '' " _ value6 correspo~ding to the recei~ing char~el wili be read out ef t,~e me~ory to thereb~ stabiLize the recep~ion quic~ly.
If ~he demodulatlon data i~ lost, the de~odulation O~
the ~erond d~ta 6tream will hardly be executed. This will be e~plaired referring to a flow chart sho7~n in Fig. 24.
Even 7 f the demodulation d~ta io 770t av~il~ble, demodulintLon o~ the 4 PS~ at Step 313 an~ of the first d~t~
stream at Step 301 can be implemented. At Step 302, the ~ o~7lllation data retrieved by the f ir~t data stream reproduci~g ~it 232 i6 transferre~ to the demodulation controller 231. If m is 4 Ol- ~ at Step 303, the demodulatio~
controller ~31 triggers demodul~ti~u Of 4 PS3 or 2 PSE at Step 313. If not, the procedurs ~oves to Step 310. At Step ~0~, tuo threshold value~ TH6 and THt6 are cclcul~ted. The thre~hold value T~l~ for ~ demodulation is fed at Step 306 from th~ de~odulation contrDller 23~ t~ ~oth the first 136 an~ thlE~ second discrimination/reproductiol cirCuit 137.
.~ence, demodulation of the modi~ied 16 QAM signal and reproductlon of the ~eco~d data stream can be carried out at Steps 307 and 316 respectively. At Step 308, the error rate ls exa~,ined and i~ high, the procedure returns to Step 313 for repeating the 4 PSK demodulation.
As shown i71 Fig. 22, the sig~ai ~oint~ 85, 83, are aligned.on ~ iine at an ar,gle of Co6(~t~_71~2) while a4 and 86 are of.E the l i7 e. H~nce, the feedback of a second da~a streQm tran~mitting carrier wave data from ~he ~econd data stream reproducing unit 233 to a carrier reproducing cir~uit c __ _ CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 ~ ~

131 is carried out so that no c~rrier needs to be e~tracted at the ti~ing uf the sign~l points 84 and 86.
Th~e trans~itter 1 i6 arranged to tran~mit carrier t~ming si~nal6 Qt interv~l~ of a given time with the fir~t data stre~m l'or the purpose of compensation for no demodulation of the ~econd d~ta 6tream. ~he carrier tim;ng si~nal enables to idsntify the signal po~nts 83 ~nd 85 of the first data stream regardl~ess of demodulation of the second data ~tre~m. Hence, the reproduct~n o~ carrier wave can be triggered bY the transmitting c~rrier data to the carrier reprociucing circuit 131.
It is then ex~mined at Step 30~ of the flow ch~rt of Fig. 2~1, whether m is 16 or not upon receipt of such modi~ied 64 QAM si~nal as shown in Fig. 23. At Step 310, it i~ al~o e~ami~ed whether m is more than 64 or not. I~ it i6 determi~ned ~t Step 3~1 that the received signal hQs no equal di~t~nc~ signal point constellation, the proced~re goe6 to step 312. The sign~l poi~t dietance T~ of the modi~ied 64 QAM 5 ig ~al i ~ calculated from:
T~ A1+AzJ2)/(Al+A2) Thi~ c~lculation is equivalent to that of T~16 but it~
resulte:nt distance between signal pOintB i~ 8mQller.
If the signal point di6ta~ce in the first sub segment 181 i~ A3J the dist~nce be~ween the fir~t lB1 and ~he second 2.5 sub ~ef~ment 182 i6 expressed by (A2-2A3). Then, the average distanc:e is (A2-2A3)/(Al+A2) which is designated as d~. When d~ is ~maller than Tz which represents the signal point discrimination ca~ability of the second receiver 33, any two sign~l point~ ir. th~. seg~ent will har~ly be distingui6hed ~r~m ea.ch other. This judgement i8 e~ecuted at Step ~13. If d~ i6 ~Ut of a permi~6iYe ran~e, the procedure ~oves back to Step 313 Tor 4 PSK modP demodula~ion. If d~ i~ within ~he ra~ge, the procedure advance~ to Step 305 for ~llowing the d~modulation of 16 QAM at Step 307. If it i6 determined at Step 308 that ~he error rate is too high, the proc~dure goe~

back tal Step ~13 for 4 PSK mode d~odulation.

Wb~en the transmitter l supplied a modified 8 QAM ~ign~l ~h ~ sho~n in Fig. 25~) in which ~ll the 6ig~al points are at angles of co6(2~f~n ~4), the carrier waves of the 6ignal are le~gthened to the same ph~6e and wi31 thus be reprod~ced with much ease. At the time, two-~it dat~ of the fir~t clata 6tream are demodulated with ~he 4-PSE receiver while ~ne-bit d~ta of the second data stream is demodulated with th~e ~econ~ receiv~r 33 and the total of t~ree-bit dat~
can be reproduced.
T~,e third receiver 43 ~ill be ~06cribed in ~ore detail.
Fig. 21:i shows a block diagra~ of the third receiver 43 simil~r to that of the second r~cei~er 33 ln Fig. 21. The di~ference 1s that a third data str~am reproducin~ unit 234 i~ added and ~l~o, ~he disc~iminationJreproduction circuit ha~ a capa~ility of identifying eight-bit data. The ant~nna 4Z of the tnird receiver 43 has a rndius r3 greater ~han r2 thus allcwirg smaller ~i~tance ~tate signals, e.g. 32- or ~4-state QAM sign~ls, to ~e demodulated. For demodul~ion of the CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 64 QAM Ic;ignal, the Pirst discriminatio~/reproduction circuit 13D ha6 to ide~tify 8 digit~l levels o~ the detected ~iGnal in whi~h ~even different threshold level~ &re Ln~olved. As one of the threshold values is zero, throe are contained in 5 the f irl3t quadra~t.
Fi~,. 27 show6 a space diagram of the signal in which the fir~t q~Adrant cont~lins ~hree different threchold v~lue~.
A~ shown in Fig. 27, when the three normalized thre~hold value~ ~re TH1~, ~H2~, and TH3~, they are espres6ed by:
T~1~ = rA1~A3~2)/(Al+AZ) TH'2~ = (A1+A2/2~(Al~A2) ~nd TH3~ = ~Al~A2-~/2)~l+A~)-Through AM demodulation of a phase detected ~ign~l u~lngthe three threshold values, the t~ird data stre~m can be 1~ reproduced like the ~ir6t and second data stream u~plained with Fi.g. Z1. The third dat~ stream contains e.g. four signal;points 201t 202, 203, 204 at the ~irst sub ~egment 181 shown in Fig. 23 which repreBent 4 value~ of two-bit pattern.
Eence, ~i~ d~gits or modified 64 QAM signal6 can be demodul~ted.
Th.e demodu}ation controller 231 detect~ the value m, A1, A2, ~nd A~ ~rom the demodul~tion data cont~ined in the first dat~ stre~m de~odulated at the firqt data s*ream reproducing unit 2:32 and c~lculates the three thre6hold val~es THl~, T~2~, Il.nd TH3~ which ~re then fed to the first 136 and the 6econd dis-riminatio~/reproduction circuit 137 so that the modi~ied &4 QAM ~ignar is demodula~ed with cert~inty. Also, if the demodulation data have been scrambled, the modi~ied 64 QAM signal c~n be dem~dulated only with a 6pecific or subscri.ber receiver. Fi~. 28 ~S a flow chart showing the actio~ of the demodulAtion controller 23i for modi~ied 64 QAM
sig~l~. The differenre from the flow ch~rt for demodula~ion of 16 C~ 6hown in Fig. 24 will be e~pl~ined. The procedure moves from Btep 304 to Step 320 wher~ i~ isT e~ in~ whethsr ~=32 o:r not. I~ m=32, demodulation o~ 32 Q~M sign~ls i6 e~ecuted at Step 322. If ~ot, the procedure mo~e~ to Step 3~1 where ;it i~ ~amined ~hether m=~4 ~r not. If ~es, A3 ic e~min~d at Step 323. I~ A3 i~ sm&ller than a predeler~ined va~ue, the procedure m~ves to Step 3Q5 and the 6a~e 6e~ence as of :Fig. 24 is implemented. If it T S judged at ~tep 323 that A3 is not sm~ller than the predetermi~ed value, the 1~ procedure goes to Step 324 where the zhreshold vaiues are calcul~.ted. At Step 325, the calculated threshold valueo are fed ta the fir~t ar~d ~econd discrimination/reprDductio~
circui1;s and at Stsp 32~ the demodulation of the ~odified 64 QAM sig,nal i8 carrled out. Then, the first, xecond, and third data sl,ream~ are reproduced ~t Step 327. At Siep 328, the error rate i~ examined. If the error rate i~ hi~h, the procedllre move~ to Step 305 where the 1T~ QAM demodul~tion i8 repeated and if low, the demudulation of the 64 QAM isT
co~t inued.
The ~ction of ca~rier wave reproduetion needed ~Dr e~ecut.i~n of a s~tis~actury de~udula~irLg procedur~ will now ~e described. The scope cf the pre~ent invention i~clude~

~ X ~ CA 02226489 1998-03-17 ~ ~ ~' .

reprod~lctio~ of the first data stredm of a modl~ied 1~ or 64 QAM ~ n~l with the use of a 4 P~h- receiver. However, Q
com~on-1 PS~ receiver rarelY reConstruct5 carrier W~ves, thus failing to perform a correct demodl~lation. For ~ompensation, some arrangements are nece6~ary at both the transmitter and rec~ive!r sides.
T~o techniques for the compensatio~ are provid~d ~ccording to the preCQnt inventio~. A ~irst t~chnique relates to trar~smis6ion of sig~al points aligned at ~ngles of (~n-1~4 al~ i~terval~ of a ~iv~n time. A ~econd tec~nique offerstransmis~ion of signal poi~ts arranged at intervals of an a~gle of n~/8.
Ac:cording to the first techn~que, the eight signal points including 83 and 85 are ~ligned at angles of ~/4, 3~4, :in/4, and 7~/4, as shown in Fig. 38. In action, at lea6t one of the eight ~ignal points is transmitted during sync ti.me 61Ot periods 452, 453, 45~, 455 arra"ged ~t egual interv~-ls of a time in ~ tim~ slot g~p 451 show.n in the time chart af Fi~. 38. Any decired signal points are tr~nsmitted d~ring the other time S10~B. The transmitter 1 i~ o arranged to assign a dat~ for the time slot interval to the sync ti~in~ d~a region 4~9 of a sync data block, as shown in Fig. 41.
The content uf a ~ransmit~ing signal ~ill be e~plained in more detail referr~ng to ~ig. 41. The time slot gruup 451 contQilling the sync time slots 452, 453, 454, 455 repre6ents a unit data stream or b1OC~ 491 carrying a data of Dn.

.c ~ L c- ~-'CA 02226489 1998-03-17 : .

The sync ti~e slot5 in the signal ~re arranged at equal interv~ls of a gi~en time determined by the ti~e slot int~rval or sy~c timing data. Hence, when the arrangement of the syr~c time 610t6 is detected, reProduction of carrier 5 wQves w:lll be executed slot b~ slot through e~tracting the syn~ ti~ing dat~ ~rom their respective time slotOE.
Such a 'sync timing d&ta S iB contained in a sync block 4~3 accompA~1ied at the front end of a data frame 492, which i8 consist~d of ~ number of the sync time slots deno~ed by the lt) hatchinE~ i~ Fig . 41. Accordingly~ the d~t~ to be sxtr~ctedL
for carrier wave reproduction ~re increased, thus allowing the 4 PS~ receiver to reproduce desired carrier waves at higher accuracy and efficlency.
Th~E3sync block 493 comprises sync data regions 496J 497, 498,---con~ining 6ync d~ta S1, S2, ~3,---respectively which include unique word~ and demodulation data. ~he phase sync 61gnal assignment region 499 is accom~anied at the e~d of the sync block 493, which hold6 a data of IT including infor~ation about interval arrange~ent and ussi~nment of the 6y~c til~e slots.
The ~ig~l pui~t da~a in the pha~e 6yrc time slot has Q
particular phase and ~aIl thus be reproduced by the 4 PS~
receiver. Accordingly, IT in the ph~e ~ync sign~l ~ssignment region 4gg c~n be retrieved Wi thout error thu~ ensurin~ the reproduction of carrier waves at accuracy.
As sho~-n in Fig. 41, the sync bloc~ 493 is iollowed by a demodLulation d~ta block ~01 whi~h contains demodulation 4~

CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 L'-~

d~ta about thre~hold voltages needed for demodulation of the modified multiple-bit QAM signal. This data ls esse~tial for demodul~tion of the multiple-bit QAM ~ignal ~nd muy prefera,bly be contained in ~ region 502 which i8 a part of 5 the 8yn.c block 493 for ease of retriev~l.
Fig. 42 shows the aosignment of signal data for transmi~siQ~ of bur~t form fiignals through a TDMA method.
Th.e Q6Slg~me:Clt i8 di~tinguiched from th~t of Fig. 41 by the fac-t that a guard period 521 is inserted between u~ty two adjacent Dn data blocks 491, 4Q1 for interruptio~ of the signal tran6mission. Also, eQch data bloc~ 4~1 i8 accompa,~ied a~ front end a sync region 522 thus forming a data b]Lock 492. During the sYnc region 522, the signQl point6 ~t a ph~e of (2n~ 4 are only transmitte~.
Accordingly, the carrier wav~ reproduction wi~l be feasible with the 4 PSK receiver. More opecifica~ly, the ~ync ~ignal an~ c~rrier waves can be reproduced throug~ the TDMA method.
Th~ carrier wave reproduction of the fir6t recei~er 23 ~hown ir Fi~. lg wil~ ~e expl~ined in more detail referring 2C to Figs. 43 artd 44, As show~t in Fig. 43, an input sig~al i8 fed through the input unit 24 to ~ sync de~ector circuit 541 where :it ic s~nc detected. A demodulated ~lgnal from the syn~ detector 541 is transferred to an output circult 542 for reprodt71ction of tne f-rst data ~tream. A dat~ of the phase sync ~ignal as~i~me~t data region 499 ~shown in Fig. 41) is retriel~ed with an extracting timing controller circuit 543 fiO
th~t the ti.ming o~ sync signals of (2n-l)~f4 data can be CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 ar~nowl~dged and transfe~red a6 a phase 6ync control pulse 561 sho~wn in Fig. 44 to a cfirr~er reproduction cu~trolling circ~it 544. Al~o, the demodulated 6ig~1 of the 8ync detector circuit 541 is fed to h frequeney multiplier ~ircuit 5~5 where it l~ 4x multiplied prior to transmitted to the carrier reproduction e.ontro'ling circuit 544. The resultant 8i~nal denoted by 562 irl ~ig. 44 contains a true phase ~ata 563 and other d~ta. As illu~trated in a time chart 5~4 of Fig. 44, the phase syrlc ti~e slots ~52 carrying the (2~ 1)~4 d~ta arls also contained at equal irter~als. At the carrier reproducing cuntrollir~ circuit 544, the sig~al 562 i8 sampled by the phase sync control pulse 561 to produce a ph~se ~ample ~ignal 565 whicb iB then converted through sample-hold action to a phase 6ignal 566. The phase slgnal 1~ 566 o~ the carrier reproduction controlling circu1t 544 i8 fed acrc~66 ~ loap filter ~48 tv ~ VCO ~47 where its relevan$
carrier wave is reproduced. The reproduced carrier ls then sent to the 6ync d~tector circuit 5~1.
In this m~nner, the 6ig~al point dnta o~ the ~2n-1)~4 phase denoted ~y the shaded area6 in Fig. 3~ i6 recovered and utilized ~o that a cerrect carrier wave can be reproduced by 4x or 16~ frequency multiplication. Although a plurality of ph~esl~re reproduced at the time, the absolute phases of the carrler can be succe6sfully be i~entlfied with the used of a 2~ unique~ord a~signed tu ~he sync re~ion 49~ sh~wn in Fig. 41.
For transmlssion of a mudifi~d ~ QAM 8ignal such ~s sho~n i~ Fig. 40, sign~l points ir. the phase syr,c are~s 471 ~1 ~t ~ ~ 02226489 l998-03-l7 _, at the (2n~ /4 phase denoted by the hstch1ng are aesigned to the sync time slot6 452, 452b, etc. Its carrier ca~ be reproduced hardly with a common 4 PSK receiver but succesfifully wi~h the first receiver 23 of 4 PS~ mode provided with the ~rrier reproducin~ circuit of the embodiment.
The foreg~in~ carrier reproduci~g circuit is of COSTAS
type. A. carrier repr~ducing circuit of reverse moduiation type will now ~e explsined according to the em~odiment.
10Fig. 45 shows a rever6e modulation type carrier reprodueir~ circuit cccording to the pre~ent invention, in which a received 6ignal is fed from the input u~it Z4 to a sync det:ector circuit 541 for producing a demodulat~d ~ig~al.
A1BO~ the input signal i6 delayed by a ~ir~t del~y circuit 15591 to a delay ~ignal. The delay ~ign~l i8 then tra~5ferred to a q~uadrature phase moclulator circuit 592 where it i~
reverse demodulated by the ~ ulated si~n~l from the 6ync detector circUit 541 to a carrier signal. The carrier 6ignal i6 fed t,hr~ugh a carrier reproduction controller circuit 544 to a phase com~arator 5~3. A carrier wave produced by a VCO
547 is delsyed by a second delay circ~it 594 to a delay 6ign~1 ~hich i~ 8160 fed to the phase comparator 593. At the phase comparator 594, the reverse demodulated carrier si~nal i8 comp.ared in phase with the de1ay signal thu6 produci~ a phase ciifference ~ignsl. The pha~e difference signal 6ent througb~ 8 loop filter 546 to the VCO 547 which in turn produce!s a carrier wave arranged in phase with the received . 52 ~~ ~ i-'- ~'~q ~~~- ~ CA 02226489 1998-03-17 carrier wa~e. In ~he same manner as of the COSl'AS carrler reproduc.ng circuit shown irl Fig. 43, an extracting timing control}er circuit 5~3 perform6 sa~plin~ of signal points contained in the hatching area& of Fi~. 39. Accordingly, the c~rrier wave of a 16 or 64 QAM ~ignal c~n be reproduced with the 4 P,SX demodulator of the fir~t receiver Z3.
Thl~ reproduction of a carrier wave by 16x ~reque~cy multipi;c~tion will be e~plained. The trar~smitter 1 ~hown in Fig. ]. is arranged to moduiate ana tr~n~mit a modified 16 QAM
6ign~1 with a~eigr~ent of its signal pointa at n~8 phase a~
shown il~ Fi~. 46. At the fir6t receivQr ~3 sho~n in Fig. 19, the car]rier Wave Can ~e reproduced with its COSTAS carrier reprodul~tion controller circuit containing a 16~ mul*ipli~r circuit 661 shown in Fig. 4B. The ~ig~al points a~ e~ch n~/8 phase s~own in Fig. 46 are proce~sed at the first quadr~nt the actlon of the 16x multiplier circuit 6Bl, whereby the carrier ~ill be reproduced by the combin~tion of a loop filter !-i46 a~d a V~O ~41. Also, the ~bsolute phase may be determi]~ed ~rom 16 different pha~e~ by Qsri~ning a unique word to the sync region.
Th~ arrangement of the 16x multiplier ci~cuit will be e~plain~E~d referring to Fi~. 48. A sum sigral and a difference sign~l ,EIre produced from the dem~dul~te~ signal by an adder cirruit 6~2 and a su~tra~ter circuit 663 respectively and then, multiplied each other by a mul~iplier 664 to a c08 2 s1gnal. ~lso, ~ mu~iplier 663 produres a sin 2e signal. The two 6ig~[lal6 are then multiplied by a multiplier 666 to a sin ~3 .__ . .A

CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 ~ ~ ' ~~

4~ ~ign~l.
Sil~ilarly, a sin 8~ signal is produced from the two, ~in 2~ and c:o~ 2a, signals by the combination o~ an adder circuit B87, a ~ubtr~cter circuit 668, aQd a ~ultiplier 670.
Furthermore, a ~in 16a signal i~ produced br the co~bination of a~ ~dder circuit B71, a subtracter ci~cuit 672, and a multiplier 673. Then, the 16~ multiplication i6 completed.
Through the foregoing 16~ multiplicstion, the carrier wave of all the sig~al poirts of the ~odified 1~ QArI si~nal shown i:n Fig. 46 wi}l ~ucce~sfully be reproduced without e~tract~ng particular signal points.
Xowever, reproduction of the carrler wave o~ the modifiel:~ 64 QAM signal ~hown in Fig. 47 can invoive an increas~e in the error rate due to di~locatlon of some signal ~oints i~rom the ~Ync areas 471.
Two techniques are known for compensation ~or the consequ~enceR. One is inhibiting transmissior, o~ the signal pointeclislocated from the sync areas. This cause~ the total amount of tran~mitted data to be reduced but allow~ the arr~ngel~ent to be facilitated. The other i6 providing the Rync t~e slots a~ described in Fig. 38. In more particular, the sig~hal points in the nn~8 sy~c phaRe areas, e.g. 471 and ~ 471a, a.re tran6mitted during the period of the corresponding ~ync time slot6 in ~he time ~lot group 451. Thls trig~er~ an ~G accurate ~ynchronizing action during the period thus minimiz:ing phase error.
As r.ow understood, the 16x multiplicatiou ~llows the -- CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 simpl~ 4 PSK receiver to reproduce the carrier w~ve of a ~odified 6 or 64 QAM ~ignal. ~lso, the insertion ~f the 6ync time ~lots ca~ses the pha~ic accuracy to be increased during lhe reprodnctio~ o~ carrier wave6 ~rom a modified 64 5 QAM 6 ignal.
A6 set forth above, the signal transmi68ion ~yste~ of the preEient invention i6 cap~ble of tr~nsmitting a plurality o~ d~ta on n ~ingle carrier wave simult~neou~ly in the multiple signal level arran~ement.
lU More specifically, three different level receivers which have d;screte characteristics of signal interc~pting sensitivity ~nd demodulating capability are provided in relatioII to one single trPn3mitter ~o th~t ~y one of them can be selectPd depending on a wanted data size to be demodul~ted which is proportio~al to ths price. When the first receiver of low resolution q~ality and low price is acquirecl together with ~ s~all antenna, its ow~er can intercept and reproduce the first dat~ ~tream of a transmiE~ion signal When the second ree~iYer of medium resolution quality and medium price is acquired together with a mediu~l~ntenna, its owner can intercept a~d reproduce both the firE~t and second data stre~ms of the sign~l. When the third receiver of high re~olution ~uality and high price is acquire~l with a large antenna, its owner ca~ int~rcept and reproduce al~ the first, second, and third data strea~s of the 6ig~1al.
If the fir~t receiver is a home-u~e digital ~tellite broadca.st receiver of low price, it will overwhelmingly be welcome by a majority of ~iewer6. The 6econd receiver acco~panied with the medium QntennQ costs more and will be &ccepted ~y not common viewers but particular people who 5 wants to enjoy HDTV ~ervices. The third receiver acc_ ~nied with the~ large antenna at lea6t before the ~at~llite output is incressed, is not appropriated for home u~e and will poesibly be u~ed in relevAnt ind~strie~. Fo~ example, the third dl~ta 6tream carrying super HDTV Bignals iB tran~mitted via B satellite to subscriber cinema6 which can thus plsy video t.apes rather than traditio~al movie f ilms and run movies lbus 1 ness at low cost.
When the pre6ent lnvention i~ ~pplied to a TV signal tra~SmilE;6ion service, three di~ferent Quality pict~res ~re carried on one signal channel wave and will offer compatilbili~y with each other. Although the ~irst embodiment refer~ t;o a 4 PS~, a modified 8 QAM, a modified 16 QAM, and a modif}.ed ~4 ~AM 6ignal, other signals will al60 be employed with equal ~uccess including a 32 QAM, a 256 Q~M, sn 8 PS~, a lB PSE., a 32 PS~ 6i~nal. It would be understood thst the pre~ent invention is not limited to a satellite tran~mis~ion sy~tem ~nd will be applied to a terreBtrial co~municatio~6 6ystem or B cable tran6mls6ion 6ystem.
i~mho d i ~ ?,:~lt ~2 A ~econd embodiment of the present invention is featured in which the physical multi-level arrangement of the first embodim,E!nt is divided into small levels through e.g.

~-FCA 02226489 1998-03-17 " ~'-dl6criniination i~ error correction capability, thus forming ~ loeic: mult- lev~l coI~structi~n. In the first embodiment, e~ch mL:lti-level channel has different 'evels in the electric ~ign~l amplitude or phy6ical de~odulating capability. The second e~bodiment offers different levels in the logic reprodL.ction capab~lity such as error correction. For exampl2, the data ~1in a multi-level channol is ~ivided into two, Dll and D1_2, component~ and Dl_l is more increa~ed in the error ;:orrection capabi}ity than D1_2 for discrimination.
Accordi:~gly, as the error detection and correction capability i6 diffe~ent be~ween D1_l and D1_2 st demodulation, ~1-1 can successfully be reprcduced within a given error rate when the C/N Le~el of an origlnal transmitting signal is as low ~s di8ena~1ing the reproduction of D1_2. Thls wlll be implemented using the lDgic multi-level arrangemeQt.
More specifically, the l~gic multi-level arrangement is con6ieted of dividin~ data of a modulated multi-level channel and discriminating distances between error correct-on code~
by ~i~in~ error correction codes with product codes for varying error correction c~pability. H~ce, n ~ore multl-level 6ignal ran be tran~mitted.
In fact, ~ Dl channel i~ divided i~to two sub ~h~nnels Dl_l and Dl_2 and a D2 channel is divided ir.to ~wo eub channel~
Dzl and D2-2 This hill ~e explained in more det~il referring to Fig.
87 in uhich Dl_1 is reproduced fr~m a lowest CJN fiignal. If the C/N rate is d at ~inimum, three cumpo~eQtS Dl_2, D2~ d ~7 .e_" ~ _ee a~r~ 02226489 1998-03-17 ~''' ~'' ' ~ ~
,~_ D2_2 can~lot be reproduced whi}e D,_i i6 reproduced. If C/~ is not les6 than c, Dl 2 can als~ be reproduced. Equally, when C~N is b, D2_1 is reproduced and when C/N is a, D2_2 i8 reproduc~d. A~ the C~N rate increns~s, the reproducible 5 signal 1 evels are increa~ed in num~er. The lDwer the C~l, the fewer the reproducible 6ignal level~. This ~ill be expl~ined in the form of rel~tion between tran~mitting dista~ce and reproducible C~N val~e referring to F~g. 86. In co~mon, the C~N value of a received slgnal is decreased in proportion to 10 the distance of transm~sslon as e~pr~~~ed by the re~l line 8~1 in Fig. 86. It is ~ow afisumed that the di6tance from transmi~cter antenna to a receiver anter~a is La when C~
Lb whe~ C/~'=b, Lc when C/~=c, Ld when C/N=d, and Le when C/N=e. If the distance fro~ the tran~mitter ~nten~a iB
greater than Ld, Dl_i can be reprodueed ~B sho~n in Fig. 85 where the receiva~le area 862 is denoted by *he ha~ching. In other ~o~ds, Dl_~ can be repr~duced within a most e~tendsd area. Slmilarly, Dl_2 can be reproduced in an area 863 ~hen the dis1:ance is not more than Lc. In this ar~a 863 containing the area 862, Dl_l can with no doubt be reproduced. In a small area 85~, D2_1 can be reproduced and in a smalleet area 865, DZ-2 can be reproduced. As und~rstood, the different data ievels of a channel can be reprod-~ced co~responding to degrees of declination in the C/N rate. The lo~ic multi-level arr~nge~l~ent of the signal tranfimission syetem of the present invention can provide the sa~e e~fect as of a traditional an~loguré~transmis~ion system 1n which th amount of receivable 5~

02226489 l998-03-l7 ~' data i6 gradually lo~ered a~ the C~N rate decre~ses.
Th.e con~tru~-tion of the logic multi--level arrangement will be described in whioh there are provided t~o phy~ic~Ll levels and two logic leveis~ Fi8. 87 is a block diagram of a treLnsmitter 1 which is su~stantially identical in construl:tion t~ t~.~Lt shown i~ Fig. 2 and described previously in the fir~t ~mbodime~t and will no further be explained in detail. The only dlf-~rence is tha~ error correcti~n code encoder~ &re ~dded as abbreYiated to ECC encoder~. Ths divi der circuit 3 has four outputs 1-1, 1-2, 2-1, and 2-2 through which fou~ 6ignals D1~, D12, D~_1, and D2_2 divided from an input signal are deliYered. The two si~n~ls D1_1 and Di_2 ~re fed to two, main and sub, ~CC encoders 872a, 873a of a first E~ encoder 671a respectively for converting to error c~rrection code formG.
The main ECC encoder 872a ha6 a k ~her e~rcr corre~tion capabili.ty than that of the sub ECC encnder 873a. Hence. Dl_ can be reproduced at a lower rate of C~N than Dl_2 ~ apparent ~ro~ the CN-level diagram uf Fig. 8~. More particul~rly, the logic level of Dl_l i~ le~s affected by decli~ation of the C~N
theLr. that of Dl2. After error cor~ection code encoding, Dl_ and Dl_2 ~L~e summed by ~ summer 874a to a Dl signAl which is then tr~Lnsferre~ tc the ~odulazor 4. rhe other t~o s~LgnAls ~2-and D~ of the divider circui~ 3 ~Lre errur correction ,.
2~ encoded by t~o, main &nd sub, ~CC encoder~ 872b, 873b of a seco~d '~CC encoder 871b respectively and then, summed by a ~summer 874b to a 1~2 signa. whlch i~ transmitted to the ~ CA 02226489 1998-03-17 '" -~
.

modulator 4. The main ECC encoder 872b i6 higher i~ the erro~ correction capability than the sub ECC encoder 873b.
The mc~dulator 4 in turn produces from the two, D1 an~ D2, input sigrals a multi-level modulated signal which i~ further tranemitted from the transmitter unit 5. As understood, the output signal from the transmitter 1 hah two physic~l level~
Dl and D2 and aleo, ~our logic levels ~ Dl_Z, D~l, and D22 ba~ed orL the two physical level~ for providing different error correCtion capab~lities.
The reception of such a multi-level signal will be e~plai:ned. ~i~. 88 is a ~lock diagram of a 8econd receiver 33 whic:h }8 almost identical in co~s~ruction to that 6hown in Fig. 2:L and described in the fir6t embodiment. The second receiver 33 arranged for intercepting multi-level signals from t3~e transmitter 1 fihown in Fig. 87 further compri~es a first 376a and a second ECC decoder 876b, in which th~
demodu:Latia~ of QAM, or any o~ ASK, PS~, and FS~ if desired, is e~ec:uted.
A~shown in ~ig. 8&, a recei~er signal is de~odulated by the ~r- o~l~lator 35 to the two, D1 and D2, signals which are then fed to two di~idere 3a and 3b respectively where they are divided into four logic le~el6 D1_1, Dl_2, Dz_l, and D2_2. The four signals are transferred to the ~irst 876a and the second ECC dect~der 87Bb i~ which D~_1 is error corrected by a main ~5 ~CC decoder 877a, D1_2 by a sub EC~ decoder 878a, D21 ~y a mai~ EC,C decoder 877b, D2_2 b~ a sub ECC decoder 878b before all sel~lt to the summer 37. At the su~mer 37, the fo~r, Dl_l, 5-~A 02226489 1998-03-17 Dl_2, D~ nd D22, error corrected ~ignQl~ are su~med to a sign~l wh~ch i~ then delivered from the outp~t unit 36~
Si~ce Dl_l ~nd D~_l are higher i~ the errcr correction capability than D1_2 a~d D2_2 re6pectively, the error rate remain6 le66 than a give~ value although C/N is fairl~- low a6 shown in Fig. as a~d thu6, an original ~ignal will be reproduced success~ully.
The action of discriminati~g the error correction capability between the main ECC decoders 877a, 877b and the su~ ECC decoders 878a, 878b will now ~e deRcribed in more detail. It i~ a good idea for having a difference in the error correCti~n capYbi~ity to use in the sub ECC decoder a common coding technique, e.g. Reed-Solomon or BC~ method, having ,E~ st~ndard code distance and in the main ECC decoder, 15 arlother encoding technique in which the di~;~ance beI,ween cor~ecti~n codes is increa6ed using Reed-Solomon code6, their product code~, or other long-length code6. A v~riety o~ known techniq~es for increasing the error correction code di~tance have be~n introduced and will ~o more e~plai~ed. The present invention can be associated with sny known technique ~or having the logi~ n~ulti-level ~rran~e~ent.
ThP logic muiti-level arrangeme~t wlll be expl&ined i~
conjunctio~ with a diagram of Fig. ~9 showing the relation between CtN and error r~te after error correction. As ~hown, 25 the ~traight line 881 represents D1_1 a~ the C/N and error rate rellation and the line 882 represents Dl_z at su~e.

A~; t~e CJN rate of an input ~ignal decreases, the error ~-FCA 02226489 l99X-03-l7 '' -~

rate increase6 after ~rror correction. If CJN i~ lo~er tAan a given value, the error rate e~ceed~ a reference value Eth determi~ed by the syetem design ~tandards and no original data will normally be reconstructed. When C/N is lowered to le~s than e, the Dl s~gn~l fails to ~e reproduced ~8 e~press,~d by the line 881 of Dl_l in ~ig. 8~. When eSC/N~d, ~1-l ~~ t.he Dl ~ig~al e~hibits a higher error rate than Eth and will not ~e reproduced.
Wh~n C/~- is d at the point 885dl D1_l having a hi~her error c,orrection cap~billty than Dl_~ becomes not higher in the errclr rate than Eth and can be reproduced. At the time, the error rate o~ D1.2 remains hi~her than Eth a~ter error correction Qnd will no longer be reproduced.
When C~' is increased up to c at the point 885c, Dl_2 lS bec~me~ not hi~her in the error rate ~han Eth and can be reprodu~:ed. At the time, D~l and D~z re~ain in no tion state. After the C/N rate i5 incre~ed further to b', i;he D2 signal become6 ready to be dsmodul~ted.
hhc~n CJ~ is incre~sed to b at the point 885b, D2_1 of the D2 ~ign~1 becomes not hi~her in the error r~te th~n Eth and can be reproduc~d. At the time, the error r~e of D~z remains higher than Eth and will no~ be reproduced. When C/N is increa6i~d up to a at the point 8B5a, D2_2 becomes not higher than Eth and can be reproduced.
2~ As described above, ~he four different signal logic level6 divided from two, Dl and D2, physical levels ~hrough discrimination of the error correction capability between the level6, can be tr~n~m~tted ~imultaneously.
Using the logic multi-level arra~gement of the pre6ent inve~tion in acrompany with a ~ulti-lev~l con6tr~ction in which at least ~ part of the origin~l 6i~nal iB reproduced even ii' data in a higher level i8 lo~t, digital 6ignal trsnsmir,~ion will successfully be e~ecuted without losing the adv~ntal~eou~ effect of an analogue 6ignal tran~ission in which t:ra~6mitting d 7ta is gradu~lly decrea6ed a~ the C~N
rate be~:ome~ low.
Th~nkine to up-to-d~t~ ima~ data co~pression tec~iqlues, compressed i~ 7ge da~Q can ~e tranEmittod in th~
logic m~llti-level ~rrangement for erLabling a re~eiver station to reproduce a higher quality im~ge than th~t of ~n ~n~logue sy6tem ~d also, with not sharply but at st~p~ declining the 6ign~1 level for en~ring ~ignal interception in a wider area. "'he present invention c~n provide an e~tra effect of the ~ull;i-layer arra~gement which is hardlY implemented by a ~nown digit~l signal transmission 6ystem without deterior~tIng high quality image data.
EmbQdim13nt 3 A *hird e~bodi~ent of the present in~ention will be de6cribed referring to ~-he rele~a~t drawings.
Fig. 29 is a schematic total view il l~strating the third embodiment 7n the form of a digital S~ broadcastin~ 6ystem.
An inpul; video signal 402 of 6uper hlgh resolution T~' image ls ~ed ~o &n input unit 403 of a first vide~ en~der 401.
Then, t]he signal is divided by a divider circuit ~04 into CA 02226489 l998 03 l7 ' ~~~~ ~ '~

three, fir~t, second, and third, data 6treams which are tran6mit~ed to a compresEing circuit 405 for data compres~ion oefore further delivered.
Equally, other three inp~t video signals 406, 40-, and S 408 are fed to a ~econd 409, a third 410, and a fourth video encoder 411 respectively which all are arranged identical in corlstrurtion to the first video encoder 401 fo~ d~ta comprossion.
Th~ four first data ~trea~s from their respective 10 encod2r~ 401, 40~, 410, 411 are transferred to a fir6t multiple~er ~13 of a multiple~er 412 where t~ey are time multiple~ed by TD~ proce~s to a fir~t data stream multiple~
~ignal which is fed to a transmitter 1.
A part or all of the ~our second ~ata stream6 from their 15 re~pective encoder6 401, 409, 410, 411 are transferred to a second multiple~er 414 of the multlpl~er 412 where they are timc multiple~ed to a second data stre~m m~ltiplex ~gnal which is then fed t~ the tran~itter 1. Also, a part or all of the four th~rd data Btre~mB are ~r~n~forred to a third muLtiploxer 415 where they are tim~ ~ultipl~ed to a third data 61;ream multiple~ s gnal ~hich is then fed to the tr~nsmitter 1.
The transmitter 1 perform~ mod~latiorl of the three data stream signals with its modulator 4 by the same manner as de~cribe~ in the ~irst e~bodiment. The modulated ~ign~l~ are ~ent from a transmitter unit 5 through an antennu 6 and an uplink 7 to a transponder 12 of a satellite lO which in turn ' ~ ~~~~~ ~ ~ i-=-~-~-CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 ' ~~~~ ~ ~~ ~~~

trans~its it to three di~fere~t rec~iver~ including ~ fir~t recei~er 23.
The ~odulated ~ignal trans~itted through a downlink 21 is inte~cepted by a ~mall antenna 22 having a radius rl and fed to a ~irst data ~tre~m reproducing unit 23Z of the first receiver ~3 where i~6 fi.st data strecm only is demod~lated.
The de~od~la~ed first data 6tre~m i~ then converted by a first vi.deo decoder 421 to ~ tradlt~onal 425 or wide-picture NTSC or ~ideo output ~ig~al 42G of low ima8e resolution.
A1EIQ, the modula~et signal tra~smitted through a downli}~. 31 is i~tercepted by a medium anten~a 32 havi~g ~L
radlus ~r2 and fed to a first 232 and ~ second data strea~
reproducing ~it 233 of a 6econd recei~er 33 where it6 first aud second data stre~m~ are demodulated respectively. The ~ c~ ted fir6t and second dats streams are then summed and convert~:d by a 6eco~d video decoder 4~2 to an H~TY or video output ~ nal 427 of high image re~olution and~or to the video OLItPUt 6ig~1S 425 and 426.
Al~io, t~e m~dulated sign~l trans~itted throu~h a dowrlinh~ 41 i8 inter~epted by a l~rge antenna 42 having a radius r3 and red to a I ir~t 232, a 6econd 233, ~nd a third data stream reproducing unit 234 of a third receiver 43 where its firet, second, and third data stream~ are demodulated re~pectiively. The demod-~lated eirst~ second, and third d~ta streams are then summed and converted ~y a third video decoder 423 to a super HDTV or video outp~it signal 428 of super high lmage re601utio~ for use in a video theater or ~ ' 'CA 02226489 1998-03-17 ''~~~

cinema. ~he video output signals 425, 426, nnd 427 can al80 be reploduced if de6irec~. A common digital TV signal i8 transmitted from a conventional digital transmitter 51 and when int~rcepted by the first ~eceiver 23, will be converted 6 to th~ ideo output sign~l 426 such a8 a low re~olution NTSC

The first video encoder 401 will now be e~plained in more de~ail referring to the block diagr~m of Fig. 30. An input v.Ldeo signal o~ sup~r high re601ution i~ fed through the input unit 403 to the diYider circuit 404 where it is divided into four ~ompo~ents by ~ub-band codi~g process. In more pa3rticular, the input video signal is sep~rated through pa~sing a horizontal lowpas8 filer 451 and a horizont~l hi~hpass filter 452 of e.g. ~MF mode tc> two, low and high, horizont;al frequency c~ _onpnt~ which are then ~ubsampled tn a h~lf of their ~uantities by t~o sub~amplers 453 and 454 respecti.vely. Th~ low horizontal component is filtered by a vertica,l, lowpass filter 455 and a vertical highpa6s filter 456 tO a low horizontal low vertical component or HLVL sign~l ~nd a lc~w hori~ont~l high vertical component or ~LV~ si~nal resp~ct:l.ve'y. The two, HLVL and HLV~, signal~ are therl subsa~p:l.ed to ~ half by two 6ubsamplers 457 and 458 respectively and transferred to th~ compressing cir~uit 405.
The high hor.i7ontal component i~ filtered by a vertica}
lowpa6s filter 459 and a ~ertical highpass filter 460 to a high ho!ri~ontal low vertical component or ~VL signal and a high horizontal high vertical component or H~V~ signal ~ ~o-rCA 02226489 l998-03-l7 _ respect.ively. The two, R~VL and H~VE, signals are then sub6am~ll ed to a h~lf by two subsamplers 461 and 4~2 respectively and transferred to th~ compre6sing circui' 405.
HLlrL BignQl i8 preferably DCT compre~6ed by a firct compres~jor 471 of the compres~ing circuit-405 and fed to a fir~t oT~tput 472 a~ the fir~t dat~ ~tream.
Al~o, HLV~ signal is c~mpres~ed by ~ second compre~sor 473 and fed to a second output 464.. H~YL 3i~na} i~ compres~ed by a third compre~60r 4~3 and fed to the seoond output 464.
~ ignal iB divided by a divider 465 into two, high resolut~on (~v~1) and suFer high re~olution ~H~V~2~, video sig~al8 whi~h are then tra~sferred to the ~econd oùtput 464 and a t]hlrd out~ut 468 respectivelY~
The fir~t video decoder ~Zl will now be explained i~
more del:ail referring to Fig. 31. The firEt data ~tream or ~l ~ignal of the first receiver Z3 i6 fed through an input unit 501 to a descrambler 502 of the first ~ideo d~c~d~r 421 where it is descra~bled. The descrambled D1 ~ig~al i6 exyanded by an e~pa~l.der ~03 to ~L~L which i~ then fed to an asp~ct ratio changing circuit 604 Thus, ~LVL signal can be delivered through ~ output uni~ 505 HS a standard 500, letter~o~
format eio7, wide-screen 508, or sidepanel form~t NTSC signal 509. The sC~nning format may be of non-interlace or interlace type a~l its NTSC mode lin~s may be 5Z5 or doubled to 1050 by 2S double tr~cing. When the received ~ign~l ~rom the digital transmitter 51 iB a digi~al T~ s~gnal of 4 PSE mode, it c~n also be converted by the fir~t receiver 23 ard the fir~t 6~

CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 video dlacoder 421 to a TV picture. The second video decoder 42Z will be explalned in more cLetaii referring to the ~lock diagram of Fig. 32. The Dl signal of the xecond rec~iver 33 is fed 1;.hrough A first iIlput L~21 to a fir6t expander 522 for data e~pansion and then, transferred to an oversampler 523 where it i8 ssmpled at 2 ~he oversa~pl~d ~i~nal ~8 filtered ~y Q vertical lowp~ss ~i lter 524 to HLVL. Al~o, the D2 ~ignal o~ the !~econd receiver 33 i~ fed through a second input 63~
to a di~ider 531 where it is divided into three co~ponents 10 which are then tra~lsferred to a second 532, ~ thlrd 533, and fourth e~pA~er 534 re~pectively for data e~pAnsion. ~he three e!spanded components are ~ampled at 2~ by three oversamplers 535, 536, 537 ~d filter~d by a vertical highpas~ 538, a vertical lowpass 539, and a vertical high-pa~ fi:Lter 540 respectively. Then, HI~ from the vertic~l lowpass fiiter 524 and ~ ~ from the vertical highpass filter ~38 are summed by an adder ~25, sampled by an over~n~pler 41, and.filtered by a horizonta~ lowpas~ filter 542 to a low frequeney hori~ontal video signal. H~VL from the vertical lowpaes filter 53~ and ~HV~l from the vertical highpas~ fi!Lter 54~ are summed by an ad~er 526, ~ampled by an oversa~pler 544, ancL filt~red by a horizontal highpa~a filter 545 to a hi~h frequency horizontal video ~ignal. The two, hlgh and low fresLuenc:y, horizontal video signal are then summed by a~
adder 543 to a high resolution video signal HD ~hich i6 ~urther transmitted through an ou~put unit 546 &S a video output 547 of e.g. HDTV format. If desired a traditional ~T6C

~ CA 02226489 1998-03-17 -~~~ - ~'-..

video autpu+ can be reconstructed w1th equal succe~s.
Fig. 33 i& a bloc~ diagrA~ of the third video decoder 423 i~hich the D~ and D2 6ignals ars fed t~rough a first 521 and a ~l~cond input 530 respectively to ~ hlgh frequency band video decoder circuit 527 where they are converted to an HD
signal by the 6 e ~an~er as above de~cribed. The D3 slgnal is fed t~rough a third input 551 to a ~uper high frequency band video decoder circ~it 5~2 where it is e~pa~ded, descrambled, and compo~ed ~o H~VH2 ~ignal. The HD Signal of the high frequency band vldeo decod~r circuit 527 and th~
~V~2 signal of the super h.gh frequency band video de~oder ~ circuit 552 are ~ ~~ by a summer 5~3 to a super hLgh resolution r~ or S-HD ~ignal which i8 then de~ivered through an outpLlt u~it 554 a~ a sup~r resolution video output ~55.
The action of multiplesing in the multiplexer 412 shown in Flg. 29 will be e~plained in ~ore detail. ~ig. 34 illustrlE~tes ~ data assignment in which the three, first, seco~d, &nd thirdr data ~tre~m~ D2, D3 contain in a period of T 8i:~ ~TSC cha~nel data Ll, L2, L3, L4, L5, L6, si~ HDTV
20 chan~el d~ta Ml, M2, M3, M4, M5, M6 ~nd six S-HDTV ch~nnel data Hl, H2, ~3, H4, H5, ~6 re~pectively. In actlon, the NTSC
or D1 6ignal d~ta Ll to L6 ~re ~ime multiple~ed by TDM
process during the period T. ~ore particularly, HLVL of D~ i~
assigned to a domain 601 for the fir~t ch~nnel. The~, a difference data ~l between EDTV and NTSC or a sum of HLV~, ~VL, al.d H~YHl iS assi~ned to a ~omain ~02 for tho first rhAnnPl. Also, a difference data ~l between HDTV and ~uper ~ ~ ~ *~ ~A 02226489 l998-03-l7 ~DT~ or ~V~2 (See Fig. 30) is assigned to a domain 503 for the ~irs~ channel.
The ~election of She fir6t charnel TV signal will now he described. ~'hen intercePted by the ~irst receiver 23 with a small antenna coupled to the first video decoder 4Zl, the fir6t ~l~annel 6ignal is converted to ~ standard or wides~reen NTSC TV ~ignal a~ 6hown in Fig. 31. When ~ntercepted by the second rs~eiver 33 with & medi~m antenna coupled to the second ~ideo decoder 422, the ~ignal i B c~nverted by 51 j ng IO L1 o~ t]he flret data 6tream Dl ah~igned to the domain 601 and Ml of the second data stream D2 as~igned to the domain 602 ~o ar, HDTV signal of the first ch~nnel equiv~lent in p~o~ram to the NTSC signal.
When intercepted by the third receiver ~3 with a l~rge 1~ a~ten~a coupled to the th~rd video decoder 423, the ~ig~al i8 conv~rt~d by ~ 1 ng Li of Dl as~igned to the do~ain ~01, Ml of D2 as~igned to the domain 602, and El o~ D3 assigned to the domain 603 to ~ super HDTV 6ignal of the first channel equival~ant i~l program to the NTSC signal. The oth~r rh~nnPl 2~ slgnals can be reproduced in an equal m~nner.
~ ig. 35 shows a~other data assignment Ll of a fir~t ohpnn~l NTSC signal is assigned to a first domain 601. The domain l3iO1 which ls alloc~ted ~t the front end of the first data stre~m Dl, al60 contains ~t fronS a data S11 including a de6crl~bling da~a and the demodula~ion data de~cribed in t~e first em~odiment. A fir~ ch~nnel EDT~ signal i9 transmil:ted as L1 ~nd ~ 1 which i~ thu6 a dif~erence data 7~

CA 02226489 l998 betweer. NTSC arld HmI~' is a6si~ned to two domain~ 602 ~nd 611 of Dz. If Ll i~ a compressed NTSC component of ~ M~ps, M1 is as two times higher as 12 M~p~. Hen~e, the total of L1 ~nd M1 can be ~ nlated at lB Mbp6 with the second receiver 33 and the ~eco~d video decoder 423. According to rurrent data compre~sion techniques, HDTV compressed signal~ can be reproduced at about 1~ Mbps. This allows the d~ta a~sig ent ~hown i3~ Fig. 35 to enable 6imultaneou~ reproduction of an NTSC and HDTV first ohAn~el signal. However, this a66ign~ent ~llow~ ~ao ~econd char~nel HDTV signal to be carried. S21 is 8 descreLmbling dsta in the ~DTV signal. A first chan~e1 super EDTV 6ignal component comprises Ll, M1, and H1. The di~fere~lce data H1 is assigned to three domairs ~03J 612, and 613 of ]:1~. If the NTSC signal is 6 Mbps, the super HDT~ i~
csrried at as high as 36 Mbp~. When a compres6ed r~te i6 i~creased, super HDTV video data of about 20no scanning line for reproductior. of a cinema 6ize picture ft~r co ercial use c~ be transmif ted ~-ith an equal manner.
~ . 36 show~ a further data sssignment in which Hl of ZO ~ ~uper HDT~ 6ignal i6 a6signed to 8i~ ti~es dom~ins. If a NTSC colllpressed signal is 6 Mbp6, this as6ig~ment can carry as nine times higher ns 54 Mbps of D3 data. AccordinglY~
sup~r E~Y data of higher picture qu~lity can ~e tran6mitted.
The foregoing data assignmeIlt ~a~es the use of one of two, htorizontal snd vertical, polarizatior pl~nes of tr~smi,~ion wave. Wher both the hcrizontai ~nd vertical polsri~tion planes are used, the frequency utlliz~tion will ~1 .... . .~

~ ~= C~A 02226489 l998-03-l7 ~ ~
.

be doubled. This ~ill be e~plained belo~.
Fi.~. 4~ show6 a data assignment in which D~l and D~l are a verticQl and a horizontal polarization signal of the first data Sl:rCAm respectivel~, ~z and D~ are a vertical a~d a 5 horizorltal polarization sigrlal of ~he second data stream respect.ively, and ~3 and D~ are a vertic~l and a hori~ontal polari7;Qtion signal of the third data ~tream re~pectively.
The vertical polarization signal DVl of the fir6t data 6tream carries a low frequsncy band or NTSC TV data and the horizon~-al polarization sig~al D~l carries a high frequency band 03' ~DTV data. When the first recelver 23 is equipped with ~ vertical polari~ation antenn~, it can reproduce only the NTSC 6i~nal. When the ~irst receiver 2~ i8 equipped with an antenn~ for both hori~ontal~y and vertically polarized waves, it can reproduce the HDTV signal through B ; ng L1 and M1. More 6pecifically, the firs~ receiver 23 can provide co~patibility between NTSC and ~DTV with the uce of a partic~,lar type antennn.
Fi~. 50 illu~trates a TDMA method in which each data burst 7:21 iB accompanied at front a sync data 731 and ~ card d~ta 741. Al~o, a frame sync data 720 iB provided ~t the front c~f ~ fa~e. Like c~nnel~ are a~signed to like time slot~. For example, a ~irst ti~e slot 750 c~rrie~ NTSC, HDTV, and super HDTV data of the first channel sim~ltaneously. The Z5 six time slo~s 750, 750a, 750b, 750c, 750d, 750e are arranged independent from each other. Hence, each station c~n o~fer N~SC, EDrV, ~nd/or supper ~DTV services independentlY of the .... .~

A 02226489 l998-03-l7 other sta~ion~ through selecting a pa~ticulQr channel of the time glot~. Also, the first receiver 23 can reproduce an NTSC
signal when eQuipped with a horizontal polarization antenna and bol:h ~TSC and HDTV signals when equipped with a compatible polarization antenna. In thi~ re6pect, the ~econd receiver 33 can reproduce a ~uper HDTV at lower resolution while th~ third receiver 43 can roproduce ~ full super HDTV
~ign~1. Accordi~g to the third embodiment, a co~patible 6ignal transmi~sion ~ystem will be constructed. It is under~tood th~t the data assignme~t is not limit~d to the burst modo TDMA method shown in Fig. 50 and another method such A8 time division multiple~ing of contlnuoufi 6ignQ~ h as sho~ l Fig. 49 ~ill be ~mployed with equal succes6. Al~o, a data a6signment shown in Fig. ~1 will permit a HD~V signal to be reproduced at high re~olution, A6 6et forth above, the compatible digital TY sign~l tran~mi~sion system of the third embodiment can of~er three, super ]mTV, ~TV, and conventional NTSC, TV broadca6t 6ervice~ 6imult~n~0usly. In additior" a video signal intercepted by a commerci~l station or cine~a can be electronized.
The~ ~odified QAM of the em~odLments is now ~er~ed a~
S~QAM and it~ error rate will be examined.
Fi~st, the error I-ate in 16 SRQAM will be calcnlated.
Fig. 99 show~ a vector dlagram of 16 SRQAM slgnal points. As app~rent from the first quadrant, the 16 6ign~1 po nte of 6tandard 16 ~M including 83a, 83b, 84a, 83a are allocated at ,,. ~

r r, ~ ~ ~r9i~=CA 02226489 1998-03 17 -e~ual interval6 of 28.
Th.~ ~ignal point 83a i~ spaced 8 from both the I-a~is ~nd the Q-~is of the coordinate. It is now a~sumed th~t n is a shift value of the 16 SRQAM. In 16 SRQAM, the 6ign&1 point 83a of L6 QAM i~ ~hifted to a signal point 83 where the di~tance irom e~ch a~i~ 16 n8. The 6hift value n is thus e~pres~ed as:

O<.l1C3 .
The other signal points 84a and 86a are al~o shifted to two pOi:~lt~ 84 ~nd 36 reepectively.
If the error rate of the first data stream i8 Pel, it is obtainel:l f rom:

Pc1-16= 4 ~ es~c t~ ) ~ crfc (,~ ) = 8 er~c (,~ ) ALso, t~e error rate Pe2 of the second data 6tream is o~tcined from:
]?~216= 2 erfc (~ ) 4 2~/9+n ~ ) ~he~ error rate of 3~ or 32 S~Q~ will be calculated.
Fig. lO0l is a vector diagram of a 36 SRQAM signal in which the dis1;ance between any two 36 QAM signal point~ i~ 2~.
The 6ignal point 83a Df 36 Q~ is spaced ~ from each a~is of the coordinate. It i8 now ass~med that n iB a shii't value oi.' the 16 SRQ~M. In 36 SRQAM, the signal point 83a is shifted to a 9 ignal point ~3 where the distarce from each -OrcA 02226489 1998-03-17 a~is i~; n~. Sim larly, the ni~e 36 QAM ~ignal points in ~he first qLuadrant are shifted to points 83; S4, 85~ 8B, 97, 38, 89, 100, 101 re~pectively. lf a 9ignal point gro~p 9Q
compris;ing the nine signal points is regardod as a single signal point, the error rate Pel in reproduction of only the ~ir~t dLa~a stream D; with a modified 4 PS~ receiver ard the error r~te Pe2 in reproduction of the ~econd data stream Dz after d.iscriminating the nine signal points of the gro~p so from each other, are obtained respectively from:

PeD-;2-- ~ crfc (,~ ) = 1 e~c ( ~ ~n~2n~
Pei!-32= 2 c~c ~4~-- p ) = 2 e~c ~ ~ ~nZ+2n~
~ i,g. 101 shows the relation between error rate Pe and CJN rat~3 i~ transmi~sion in wh}ch the curve 90O repre3ents a conventional or not modified 3~ QAM signal. The ~traight llne 905 repre~ents a si~nal having lOl-5 of the error rate. Tho curve 901a represents a Dl level 3~ SRQAM s~gnal of the present i~vention at th~ 6hift rat~ n of 1.5. As shown, the C/N rat,e of the 32 SRQAM ~lgnal is 5 dB lower ~t the error rate oi.' 1ol5 than that of the conventional 32 Q~M. Thi~
meanr that the present invention allows a D1 signal to b~

Z~ reproduced at a give~ error rate when it~ C/N rate i~
relatively low.
The curve 902a represents a D2 level SRQA~ signal a~

. ~

02226489 l998-03-l7 - l ~

n=1.5 which can be reproduced at the error rate o~ 101-~ only when its C/N rate is 2.5 dB higher thsn that of the conve~t~onal 32 Q~ of the curve 900. Al60, tho curves 901b and 902b represent Dl Qnd D2 S~QAM 6i~nals at n=2.0 respectively. The curves 902c represents ~ D2 SRQAM sign~l ~t n=2.5. It is apparent that the C/N rate of the SR~AM 6ignal at the er~or rate of 10l5 is ~d~, 8dB, ~nd lOdB high~r at n=1.5, 2.0, and 2.5 respec~ively in the Dl level and 2.5 dB
lower i~ the Dz level than thAt o~ a c- 32 QAM sign~l.
Shown in Fig. 103 is the C~N rate of the first ~nd secand data st-eam6 Dl, ~2 of a 32 SR~AM signal which i6 needed for m~int~ining a const~nt error rate again~t variation of the shift n. As apparent, when the skift n is more ~h,~n 0.8, there i8 developed a clear difference between two C/N rates of their respective D1 and D~ levels so that the mu~ti-level signal, namely first and ~econd data, transmi~ision can be implemented successfully. In brief, n>0.85 i6 essential for multi-level data tran6mission of ~he 32 S~QAM signal of the prese~t invention.
ZO Fig. 102 BhOWS the relatio~ betw~ the C~N rate and the error rate for 16 SRQAM signals. The curve 9OO represents a common 16 QAM signal. The curves 9O1Q~ 9Olb, 9Olc ~nd D
level o~ ~irst data stream 16 SRQAM signal6 at n-1.2, 1.5, and 1.8, respectively. The curves 902a, 902b, 902c are D2 le~el or second d~ta stre~m 16 S~QAM signals at n=1.2, 1.5, and 1.8 respectively.
The C/~ rate of the first and second data streams D1, D2 ,~ r ~ *~ ~~ 02226489 l998-03-l7 of a lB SRQ~M ~ignsl i~ shown in Fig. 104, which is needed for maintaining ~ con6tant error rate against variation of the 6hiEt n. A~ app&rent, when the 6hift n i6 more th&n 0~9 (n~0.~), the multi-level d~ta trn~smi~ion of the 16 S~QAM
signal ~ill be e~cuted.
OnE~ e~ample o~ propagation of SRQAM signals of the pre~ent invention will now ~e described for use with a digltal TV ~urrestrial broadca6t service. Fig. 105 shows the relatioll between the signal level a~d the distunce betw~en a tr~nc~il;ter antenna ~nd ~ receiver antenna in the terro~trial broad C~ElSt service. The cur~e 911 represents ~ transmitted signal ~ro~ the transmitter antenna of 1250 feet high. It is a~sumed that the error rate e~sential for reproduction of an ~ppLicalble digital TV ~ignal i9 10 1-5. The hatching area 912 repreoents a noise interruption. The point ~10 represent6 a signal receptioD limit of a conventional 32 QAM signal at CfN~l~ dB where the di6tance L i~ 60 ~ilefi ~nd ~ digital HDTV
sigu~l can be intercepted at minimum.
Thl3 C~ rate varie~ 5 dB under a worse receiving conditicm such as bad weather. If ~ chan~ in the relevant cor.~ition, e.g. weather, attenu&tes the C/N r~te, the interception of an ~DTv 6i~n~1 will hardly be ensured. Also, geograpl:lic~l conditlon6 largely affect the propagation of signals &nd a decre~se of about 10 dB at lea~t will be u~avoid;1~le. Hence, ~ucces6ful signal i~terception ~ithin B0 miles will never be gu~ranteed and above &ll~ ~ digital signal will be propagated harder Ihan an analogue si~naL. It .... . .. ~

~CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 would be understood that the ~ervice area of a conventional digita:L TV brosdca6t ~ervice is les6 dependable.
In ca~e of the 32 SRQAM signal of the pre~ent invention, three-].evel signal transmi66ion sy~tem i9 con~tituted as show~ i.n Figs. i33 and 137. This permits a low re~olution NTSC signal of MP~G level to be carri~d on thu 1-1 data stream ~ A medium re~olution TV data of e.g. NTSC system to be carried on the 1-2 data stream DS_2, and a high frequer.lcy cemron~nt of HDTV data to be carried on the second data 6t:ream D2. Accordingly, the service area of the 1-2 data stream of the SRQAM signal i~ increa~ed to a 70 mile point ~1Oa wh.ile o~ the second data stream remains within a 5~ mile point 910b, as shown in F~g. 10~. Fig. 10~ i}lustrates a computer simulation res~lt of the service area o~ the 32 SRQAM 6ign~1 of the pre~ent invention, which is similar to Fig. 53 but e~plains in more detail. As shown, the region6 708, 703c, 703a, 703b, 712 repre~ent a con~entional 32 4AM
receivu.ble area, a 1-1 data level D1_1 receivable area, a 1-2 data level D1_2 receivable area, a second dat~ level D2 recei~a.ble area, and a service area of a neighbor ~nalogue TV
statioD. re~pectiv~ly. The conventional 32 QAM ~i~nal data used lD. this drawing is based on a conventionally disclo~ed o~e.
Fa,r common 32 QAM signal, the 60-mile-radius service 2~ area call be established theoretically~ Tbe si~nal level will however be attenuated by geographical or weather conditions and particularly, considerably declined at ~ear the limit of , ,,L .,~ ~'=C-~A 02226489 l998-03-l7 _, the 60rvice area, I~'the low frequency band TV component o~ MPEGl grade is carriec1 oa the 1-1 level D1_1 data and the med um frequency band TV'ct -e~t of NTSC gr~de on the 1-2 level D1_2 data and high fra~uenc~- band TV component of HDTV on the ~econd level D2 datQ, the ~ervice area of the 32 SR~AM signal o~ the present invention is increased by 10 miles in radius for reception of an EDTV 6ignal of medium resolution grade and 18 miles for reception of an LDTV sig~al of low resolution grAde althcugh decreased by ~ mile6 ~or reception o~ a~ HDTV signal of high resolu~ion grade, a8 shown in Fig. 10~. Fig. 107 shows a 6ervice area in case of a shift f~ctor n or s ~ 1.8.
Fig. 135 E;hows the service area of Fig. 107 in terms of ~rea.
Mcre particularly, the medium re~olutlon component of a digital TV broadcast 6ignal of the S~QAM mode of the pre8et invention can successfully be intercepted in a~ unfavorable service region or ~hadow are~ where a conventional medium ~requeD.cy band TV signal is hardly propagated and attenuated due 'o obstacle6. Within at lea~t the predetermined service area, the NTSC TV ~igrs~l of the S~QAM mods can be intercepted by any traditio~al TV receiver. As the shadow or si~nal attenu~.ting area developed by buildi~g structures and other obstac},es or by in~erference of a neighbor analogue TV ~ignal or produced in a low l~nd i~ decreased to a ~ini~u~ TV
ViewerE, or su~cribers will ~e increased ln number.
A]so, th2 HDTV service can be appreciated by only a few viewer~; who ~fford to have a set of high cost HDTV receiver 7~

~ ~ ~ ~~ '=- ~ 'CA 02226489 1998-03-17 , ~ .

a~d diE;play, according io the conventional system. The system of th~ present invention allow6 a traditional NTSC, PAL, or SECAM receiver to intercePt a medium resolution component of ~he di~ital HDTV signal with the use of an additionai digital tuner. A majority of TV viewers c~n hence enjoy the service at les~s, cost and will be increased in number. This will encourE~ge ~he TV broadcast busines~ and create an e~tra ~ocial benefit Furthermore, the signal receivable area for medium resolut,ion or ~'TSC TV service according to the present invention is increa~ed about 36X at n=2.5, Q6 compared with the co~ventional 6Y~tem, A~ the service area thus the number of TV viewers is increased, the TV broadc~st business en~oy~
an incre~asin~ profit. This reduce~ a risk i~ the development of a new digital TV business which will thu~ be encouraged to put into practice.
Fi~. 107 shows the servico area of a 32 SR4AM signal of the pre~e~t inventio~ in which the same effect will be ensured at n=1.8. Two service ~reas 703a, 703b of Dl and D~
signals respectively can be determined in extension for optimum si~nal propagation by varyin~ the 6hift n co~sidering a profile of ~DTV and NTSC receiver di~tribution or geographical features. Accordingly, TV viewers will sQtisfy ~he servioe ~nd a supplier station will enjoy a maximum of viewers.
This advantage is given when:
n? 1 . 0 .. . .~

~ ~CA 02226489 1998-03-17 ~'''~~~~ ~ ~~ ~

-Hence, if the 32 SRC~ signal is selected, the 6hift n iB
determ ined by:
1 ~'~<5 Also, i f the 16 SRQAM si~nal i~ empLoyed, n is determined by:
1 <:n<3 I~l the S~QAM mode ~ignal terrestrial broadcast service in which the first ~nd second data levele are created by ~hifti~lg corresponding sigIIal poirits as shown in Figs. 99 and 100, the advantags of the pr~sont invention will be give~
when tho shift n in a 16, 32, or 64 SRC~i signal i~; more than 1 .0 .

ID. the above embodiments~ the low and high frequency band ctlmporient~ of a video ~ignal are transmitted a2; the first and second data stre~i6. Ho~vever, the transmitted 15 si~nal ~1ay be an audio signal. In this case, lo~ frequency or low rel301ution com~onentE; of ari audio signal may be transmi tted as the f irs~ d.ata strei~m, and high fretlusncy or high r~asolution c - ?rt8 of the audlo sigri~l may be transmi-tted as the second data stre~m. Accordingly, it i8 possibll! to receive high C/N portion i~ high ~ound quality, and lo~i~ C/l~' portiori in low sound quality. This can be utillzed in PCM broadcast, radio, portable telephone and the like. I~ this c~se, the broadcasting area or communication distance csri be expa~ded as co~ipared with the conv~ntional syste~s.
Further~ore, the third embodiment can iricorporate a time dlvisiol:l multiplexing (TDM) 6ystem as 6hown in Fi~. 133.

Utiliz~tion of t~e TD.~ ma~es it possible to increa6e the number c~f cubcha~nels. An ECC encoder 743a and an ECC encoder 743~, provided in two subchannel6, differenti~te ECC code gai~s ~o as to make ~ difference between threshold6 of ~hese 5 two ~ubchannels. Whereby, an increase of rh~nnRl number of the mull~ level 6ignal tra~smi6sion can be realized. In this ca~e, it i~ AlSO possible to provide two Trellis encoderE
743a, 743b as 6hown in Fig. 137 and dlfferentiate their code gain9. The e~planation of this b}ock ~iagr~m i6 ~0 subst ntinlly identical to that of later described bloc~
diagram of Fi~. 131 which shows the sixth embodiment of the present invention and, therefore, will not described here.
In a simulation of Fig. 106, there is provided 5 da differe:llce of a codin~ gain between 1-l subch~nnpl Dll and 1-2 ~ubch~nnel Dl_2.
An SRQAM is the system a~plying a C-CDM tConstellation-Code Di.visi~n Multiplex) of the present invention to a rectangle-QAM. A C-C~M, ~hich is a multiple~ing method independent of TDM or FDM, can obtain ~ub~hannels by dividing a con~tellation-code corresponding a code. An increa~e of the number uf codes w~ll bring ~l expan~ion of tran~mis6ion capacit~y, which is not attained by TDM or FD~ alone, while ~aintaining almost perfect compatibility with conventional communication apparatus. Thus C-CDM ~an bring e~cellent effects.
Although abo~e embodiment co~bines the C-CDM an~ the TDM, it is al60 possible to co~bine the C-CDM with the FDM

2~A 02226489 l998-03-l7 ' ~~

~Fre~u~ncy Division Multiplex) to obtain similar ~dulation effect of threshold values. Such a ~ystem can be used for a TY broadcQstin~, and Fig. 108 ~hows a frequency distribution of ~ l'V signal. A spectru~ 725 represent~ a ~req-nency distribution of a conventicn~l analogue, e.g. NTSC, broadcasting slgnal. The largest sig~al is a video carrier 722. A.color carrier 723 and a sound carrier 724 are not ~o large. There is known a method of uslng ~n FD~ f or dividing ~ digital broadca~ting 8ignal into two frequencie~. In this case, a carrier i8 divided int~ a f irst carrier 726 and a ~econd carrier 727 to tran6mit ~ fir~t 720 and a ~econd signa~ 721 respectively. An interference can be lowered by p~.~cing 'irst and ~econd carriers 7Z6, 7Z7 ~fficiently f ar from the video carrier 7Z~. The first ~ign~l 720 serve~ to 1~ tranc~i.t a low re~olution ~V signal at a large outpUt 3Level, whi le the second signal 721 6erv~S to tran~it a high resolut;io~ T~' ~ignal ~t a ~mali output level. Consequently, the multi-level si~nal tr~nsmisfiiorL ma~ing u~è of an FDM can be re~].ized without being bothered by ob~truction.
Fi.g. 134 shows an e~ample of a cnnventional ~ethod usin~
a 32 ~!~ system. As the subcharnel A has a larger oltput ~han the subchannel B, a threshold value f or the subchannel A, iL.e. ~ threshold 1, can ~e set small 4~5 dB than thresho,ld value for the ~ubch~nnel B, i.e. a thr~sho~d 2.
AccordiLn~ly, ~ two-le~el broadcasti~g having 4~5 dB threshold differ~nce can be realiz.ed. In this c~se, however, a large reduct:Lon of signal reception amount will occur if the .... . .~

.. . . ~

rece_ving ~ig~al level decrease~ below the threshold 2.
Because the second signal 721a, having a large in~orm~tion amount ~s shaded in the dra~-ing, cannot be received in such a case and only the first signal 720P, h~ving a smQll iuformation ~moun~, is received. Consequently, a picture qualitr brought by the OEecond level will be elctremely worse.
Hc~wever, the present irlvention resQlves thi~ probiem.
Accordlng to t~e present in~ention, the first 8ignal 720 ls giVe~ TDY 32 SRQ~ mode which i~ obtained through C-CDM
modulni;ion so that thc 6UbchAnn~l A is dlvided into two subch~nels 1 of A and 2 o~ A. The newly added subch~nnel 1 of A, havlng ~ lowe~t threshold value, carries a low re~olu1:ion component. The 6econd signal 721 is also ~iven by 32 S~QA.M ~ode, and a threshold value for the subchannel 1 of B is ectualized with the threshold 2 With this arrangement, the region in ~hich a transmltted signal is not received when the signal level decreases below the thrleshold 2 i~ reduced to a shaded portion of the second signal 721a in ~ig. 1~8. As the subchannel 1 of B and the subcharLnel A are both receivable, the transmie~ion amount i8 not 60 much reduced in total. Accordi~gly, ~ better p~cture qu~lity is reproduced even in the ~econd level at the sign~l level of the threshold 2.
By tran~mitting a normal resolution component in one sub~hAnnel, it becomes possible to increase the n~mber of multiple level and e~pard ~ low resolution ser~ice area.

Thi~ low-thre~hold subchannel is utili~ed for transmitting ~ CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 ~ ~

importa~t information such as sound in~ormation, ~ync information, he~der6 of re~pective data, because these information carried O~l thifii low-threshold s~ch~nnel can be surely :received. Thus stable reception ie fea~ible. If a 6ubch~nl-~1 is newly added in the second signal 721 in the 6ams ~ner, the level num~er o~ multi-level transmi~6ion can be incr~Qsed in the service area. In the case where an ~DT~
~ignal has 1050 scanning lines, an new service aren equivall~nt to 775 line~i can be provided in addition to ~25 lines.
Acc:ordingly, the combination of the FDM and the C-CDM
realize~i an increase o~ service area. Although abo~e embodimt~nt divides a subchannel into two, it is needless to say it 1will also be pre~erable LO divide it into three or more.
Nest, a ~ethod of avoidi~g obstruetion by combining the TDM and the C-CD~ will be explained. A6 shown in Fi~. 109, an analogue TV signal includes a horizontal retrace line portion 732 and a video signal porti.on 731. This method utilize~ a low signal level of the ~.orizontal retrace line portion 732 ~nd non -di~play of obstruction on a picture plane during this period. Ry synchronizing a digit~l TV signal with an arLslogue TV signal, horizontal retrace line sync slot~
733, ~33a of the horlzontal retrace line portion 732 can be used for trarsimission of an important, e.g. a 6ync, ~ignal or numeroufil d~ta at a high output lev~l. Thu~, it becomes possible! to increase data amount or output level without CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 increa~;ing obstruction. The similar effect wil~ be expected even if vertical retrace line sync slots 737, 737a are provided ~ynchronously with vertical retrace line portio~s 735, 7~l5~.
Fi.g. 110 shows a principle of the C-~DM. Furthermore, Fig. 1l1 ~hows a code a~~ign~ent of the C-CDM equivalent to ~n e~p~.nded 16 QAM. Flg. 112 shows A code ~ssienment of the C-~D~ ~quivalent to an expanded 36 QAM. A~ shown in Figs.
110 ancl 111, a 256 Q~M 8ignal iS di~ided i~to four, 740a, 740b, 7-1.0~, 74~d, levels which have 4, 16, 64, 256 5egment6, respectively. A 6ignal code word 742d of 256 QAM on the fourth levei 740d is "11111111" of 8 bit. This is ~lit into four codewords 741a, 7~1b, 741c, and ~41d of 2-bit ---- i.e.
"11", "11", "11", "ll", which are then allocated on signal point rlagion~ 742a, 742b, 742c, 742d of first, fiecond, third, fourth levels 740a, 740b, 740c, 740d, respectively. As a re~ult, subchannels 1, 2, ~, 4 of 2 bit are created. This is termed~s C-CDM ~Constellation-Code DiviRion Multipl~). Fig.
111 sho~w~ ~ detsiled code a~signment of t~e C-CDM equivalent to ~pEln~ed 16 Q~M , and Fig. 112 shows a detailed code assignment of the C-CDM equivalent to e~pa~ded 36 QAM. As the C-CDM i5 ~n independent multiple~ing system, it can be com~inel~ with the convention~l ~DM (Frequency Division Multipl~) or TDM (Time DivisLon ~ultiple~) to further increa6le the num~er of subch~nnels. In this manner, the C-CDM system realizes a ~ovel multiple~ing system. Although the C-CDM is e~piai~ed by using a rectang~e Q~M, other 8~

~rCA 02226489 1998-03-17 ~ --~- - -- - -modulat.on system ha~in~ sign~l points, e.g. QAM, PS~, AS~, and ~v~n FSK if freque~cy re~ion~ are regarded as 6ignal points, can be ~160 used for thi6 multiple~Lng in the same manner.
Fmhodi~nt 4 A fourth embodi~ent of the ~resent invention will be de~cribo~d referri~g to the relevant drawings.
Fig. 37 illustrates the entire arrnngement of a slgnal tran6mi6sion sy6tem of the ~ourth embodiment, which is s~ranged for terrestrial service and ~imilar in both construction and action to that of the third embodiment 6hown in Fig. 29. The difference 18 that the transmitter antenna 6 i6 repl~ced with a terrestri~l antenna 6a and the receiver antenna~ Z2, 23, 24 are replaced with also three terrestrial ante~na~ 22a, 23a, 24a. The action of the sy~tem i8 identicl~l to that of the third embodiment a~d will no more be e~plainlsd. The terrestrial broadcast service unli~e a satellite 6ervice depends ~uch on the distance between the transmitter ante~na 6a to the receiver anten~a~ 22a, 32u, 2~ 42a. lf a receiver is located far from the tran~mitter, the level o~ a received signal is low. Particularly, a common multi-1~3vel QAM 6ignal can hardly be demodulated by the receive:r which thus reproduce~ no TV progr~m.
Thls sign~1 tr~ns~ission system of the present inve~tion allows l;he first receiver 23 equipped with the anten~a 22a, which is located at a far distance as shown in Fig. 37, to intercept ~ modified 16 or 64 QAM s-gnal ~nd demodulc~e ~t 4 ~~CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 PSE mode the first data 6tream or Dl componert of the recei~ed si~rnal to an NTSC video signal so that a TV program p i c ture of medium resolution can be disp~ayed ever. if the level c,f the received signal i8 relatively low.
Al.so, the second receiv~r 33 with the antenna 32a is located!at a medium distnnce from the anter~a 6a And can t~U8 interce~pt and demo~ulate both the first and ~econd data stream~ or D1 a~d D2 component~ of the ~odified 16 or 64 QAM
~lg~al1:o an HDTV video 6ignal which in turu produce6 a~ HDTV
progr~. picture.
Th.e third receiver 43 with the a~ten~a 42a ifi located at a near distance and can intercept and demodlllate the first, second, and ~hird data 6treams or Dl, D2, and D3 components of the modified 16 or 64 QAM signal to ~ 6uper H~TV video signal 15 which i;n turn produces a super ~D~ picture in quality to a common movie picture.
The a~signment of frequenciefi is determined by the same ma~ner ~s of the time divi~ion multiple~ing shown in Fig~.
34, 35, and 36. Llke ~ig. 34, when the frequencies are a~signed t first to si~th channels, L1 of the D1 component carrie6 an NTSC data o~ the ~irst channel, Ml of the D2 component carries an HDTY difference data of the first channel, a~d ~1 of thè D3 component carrie6 a fiuper HDTV
differe:nce data of the first cha~nel. Accordingly, NTSC, HDTV, ~nd super HDTV da~a all can be carried on the same channel. If D2 and D3 of the o~her ch~nnels are utilized as show~ in Fig~. 35 and 36, more data of ~DTV and ~uper ~DT~

f _ 1 ._ __ .~.O ~ 0 2 2 2 6 4 8 9 1 9 9 8 - 0 3 - 17 respectively can be trans~itted for higher resolution display AE; understood, the system allows three dif~erent but ~ompati.ble digital TV sign~ls to be carried on ~ single channe]. or using Dz and D3 regions of other channels. Also, the med.ium resolution TV picture dRt~ o~ e~ch ch~nnel can be interce!pted in a wider ~ervice area according to the present invention.
A variety of terrestrial digital TV broadcat~t system6 employi:ng a 16 QAM H~TV ~ignal of 6 MHz b~ndwidth have been propo6ed. Those are however not compatible with the existing NTSC-~y~3tem and thus, have to be associated with a simulca~t technique for tran~mitting NTSC signals of the same program on anot:her channel. Also, such a ~ ~n 16 QAM ~ignal limits a 6erviee area. The terrsstrial service 6ystem o~ the present i~vention allows a receiver loc~ted ~t a relatively ~ar di~tanc~ to intercept succes~fully a medium resolution TY
signal w~th no ut~e of ar. &d~itional d~vic~ nor an e~tra ~~hnnnel .
Fig. 52. shows an int.erference region of the service area 702 of a conventional terrestri~l digital HDTV broadcast station 701. As shown, the service area 702 of the conv~ntional HDTV station 701 is intersected with the service area 712 uf ~ neighbor analogue TV station 711. At the intersecting region 713, an HDTV signal is attenuated by slgnaliinterference from the analcgue TV station 711 and will thus be intercepted with less consistency.

02226489 1998-03-17 1~

F:ig. 53 shows an interference region as60ciated wi~h the ~ulti-le~el ~ignal transmi66ion ~y~tem of the present i~vention. The system is low in the enerey utii~ation a~
co~pared with & conventional ~ystem and it~ ~ervice area 703 for HD'i~ signal propagation i6 smaller than the are~ 702 of the co~ventional 6y~tem. In ContrQry, the service area 704 for digital ~TSC or medium re30lution TV signa]. propagation is larger than the conve~tional area 702. The level o~ slgnaI
interference from a digital TV statior. 7~1 of ths sy~t~ to a neigh;bor analogue TV ~ation 7~1 is equivalent to that from conv~:ntion~l digit~l TV station, cuch a6 ohown in Fig. 2.
III the service area of the digital TY ~tation 701, there are three interference regions developed by signal inter~eren~e from the analogue TV station 711. Both HDTV and NTSC signal6 ~an hardly be intercepted in the first regLon 705. Although fairly interfered, an NTSC signal may be interce!pted at an e~ual level in the second region 706 denoted.by the left down hatching. The NTSC signal is carried on the first data stream which can be reproduced at a rel~ti~ely low C~N r~te ~nd will thus be ~inlmum a~fected wher~he C/h' rate is declined by si~nal interference from the analogu.e ~V 6tation 711.
A~ the 'hird regio~ 707 denoted by the ri~ht down hatchiD.g, an HDTV ~ignal can also be intercepted when slgnal 2~ inter~erence is abse~lt while the NTSC signal can co~tantly be intercepted at a low level.

A~cordingly, the overall signal receivable area of the ~ ~~CA 02226489 1998-03-17 '~
_, sy6te~ ~rill be increa6ed although the 6ervice area of ~DTV
signals become~ a little bit smaller t;han that of the conventi.onal system. Also, at the signal attenuating region6 produced by interference from eLneighbor analogue TV 6tatio~, NTSC level ~ignal~ of an HDTV program can successfully be intercepted as compared with t~e coDLventional system where no HDTV pralgram iB viewed in the same area. The sy6tem of the pre8ent i~vention much reduces the size of signal attenuating area ancLwhen increase~ the energy o~ signal trnnsmis~ion at a tran~mitter or tra~cpondQr station, can e~tend the ~DTV
signal ~ervice area to an equal 8ize to the conventional 6ystem. Al~o, NTSC level signal6 of a TV progr~m can be interce~ted more or le6~ in a far distance are~ where no ser~ice i~ ~iven by the conventional system or a si~nal 15 interfel~ence ~Lrea causcd by an adjacent analogue TV BtBtion, Alt;hough the embodinent employs a two-level signal t~an6miEi6ion method, a three-level method such as shown in Fig. 78 will be u~ed with equal succes~. If eLn HDTV signal i6 divided into three picture levels-~TV, NTC, and low re~ol~i.on ~'TSC, the service area shown in Fig. 53 will be increased fro~ two l~vel~ to three levels where the 6ignal propaga1;ion is extended radially and outw~rdly. Also, low re~olution NTSC ~ignals can be received at ~Ln acceptable level at; the fir6t signal interference region 705 where NTSC
Z5 signals are hiLrdly be i~tercepted in the two-level system. As understood, the signal inter~erence is al60 involved from a digital TV 6tation to an analogue TV st~tion.

,_~ 4 r~ , r~ t~CA 02226489 1998-03-17 1~

-The description will naw be continued, provided that no digit~l TV ~tation should ~~ause ~ sign~l interfere~ce to any neighbor a~alogue TV station. According to a novel system under consideratlon in U.~.A., no u~e ~hAnn~ls of the e~isting service ch~els are utili~ed for HDTV and thus, di~ital 6ignals mu8t ~ot i~terfere with an~ogue signals.
For the pur~ose, the transmitting level of a digital ~ignal has to ~le decreased lower than that shown in F~g. 53. I~ the digital sig~al iB of conventional 16 QAM or 4 PS~ mode, its HDTV 6er~ice area 708 becomes decreased as the slgnal interference re~ion 713 denoted by the cro66 hatching is fairly ].arge as shown iu Fig. 54. This results in a less number of viewers and 6porl~0rs, whereby s~ch ~ digital sy6tem will have much difficultY to operate for profitable business.
Fi~. 55 show~ a similar result according to the syAtem of the prese~t invention. A~ apparent, the H~TV sign~l receivahle 703 is a little bit smaller than the equal area 708 of t~e conventional 6ystem. However, the lower re~oluti~n or NTSC TV signal receivable area 704 will be increa~ed as Z0 compared with the conventional 6ystem. The hatching area represents Q re~ion where the NTSC level signal of a program can be ~received while the HDTV signal of the same is hardly intercepted. At the first interference region 705, both HDTV
~nd NT'3C signals Cannot be intercepted due to signal interfere~ce from a~ analo~ue station 711.
When the level of signals i8 equal, the multi-level transmi~sio~ system of the present invention provides a ~2 ~~~A 02226489 1998-03-17 smQller HDTV service area and a greater NT&C service area for inter~eption of an EDTV progra~ at an NTSC ~ignal level.

Accordillgly, the overall service area of e~ch station is increase~d and more viewers can enjoy its TV bro~dcasti~g ~ervice. Further~ore, HDTV/NTSC compatible TV busine6s can be oper~ted wit~ ecoromical adva~tages and consistency. It i6 al~o i~,tended that the level Of a tran6mitting 6ignal is increa6ed when thu control on averting signal interference to neighbor an~logue T~' stations i~ lesser~ed corre6po~ding ~o a sharp illcreaSe in the number of ho~e use digit~l ~eceiver~.

Hence,lthe service are~ of ~DTV signals will be increased ~nd in thiS res~ect, ~he twD different regions for interception of ~DTVJ'NTSC and ~TSC digital TV signal levels re~pectively, 6hown in ~ig. 55, can be adjusted 1~ proportion by varying 16 the signal point distance in the first and/or ~econd d~ta s~re~m. As the first data stream carries information about the sip~al point distance, a multi-level signal can be recelved w;th more certainty.
Fi~. 56 illu6trates signal interference between two digital TV stations in which a neighbor TV station 701a ~lso providei a digital TV bro~dcast service, as compared with an analogu~e statio~ in Fig. 52. Si~ce the ~evel of a transmitting signal becomes high, the HDTV service or high re801ution TV signal reoeivable area 703 in increased to an e~tension equal to the service area 702 of ar. analogue TV
system.
At,the intersecting region 714 between two s~rvice areas f ~ ' i~A 02226489 l998-03-l7 ''' - ~

of their respective statio~s, the re~eived sigral can be reproduc~ed not to a~ H~TV level picture with the use of a common d.rectional antenna due to sig~al interference but to an NTS~ level picture with a particular dire~tior~al antenna directed toward~ a desired TV station If a highly directil~nal antenna i~ ~sed, the received 5ignal from ~
target Cl~ation will be reproduced to an HDTV picture. The low resolution aignal receivable area 704 is increa6ed larger than the ~n~logue TV 6yst~m ~ervice area 702 and a couple o~
intersec~ting regions 715, 71~ developed by the two low resolut:i.o~ signal receivable arees 7~4 and 704a of their re~pect.ive d~gital T~ stations 701 and 701a permit the received signal from antenna directed one of tke two statio~s to be r~.~produced to an NTSC level picture.
The ~DTV service area of the ~ulti-level si~nal transmil36ion system of the pre6~nt inve~tion itself will be much inl-reased when applicable signal restriction rules are withdral~n in a coming digital TV broadcast service maturity time.
At the time, the system of the present invention also provide~s as a wide HDTV ~ignal receiv~ble area as of the conve~tional sy~tem and particularly, ~llow~ it~ transmittin~
signa~ to be reprod~ced at all NTSC le~el in a f~rther distance or intersecting area~ where TV signals of the conventional system are hardl~ intercepted. Accordingly, ~ignal attenuatin~ or sh~dow re~ions in the service area will be mi~limized.

g4 =-.c~~. 03 17 ~hndiml!nt 5 A fir6t embodimer~t of the pre6ent invention resides in a~plltu~1e modu7ation or ASE procedure. Fig. ~7 illustrate~
the a6sig~me~t of si~nal point6 of a 4-level AS~ signal 5 according to the fifth embodiment, in which four signal point6 are deno~ed by 721, 722, 723, ~nd 7Z4. The four-level t~nsmi~sion per~its a 2 - bi t data to be ~ransmitted in every cycle period. It is assumed th~t the four sign~l points 721, 722, 723, 724 represent two - bit patter~s 00, 01, 10, 11 re6pect:ively.
For ease uf four-level 8ignal tran6mis6ion of the embodiment, the two ~ignal points 721, 722 are design~ted a6 ~ first 6ignal point group 7~ ~nd the other two 723, 724 are designa1;ed a6 ~ second 6ignal point group 7Z6. The dist~ce between the two signal point groups 725 and 726 ~s then dete~ in,~A wider than that betweer. any two adjacent signal points. More specifically, the distsnce Lo between the two sign~16 722 ~nd 723 i6 arran~ed wider than the distance L
between the two adJacent points 721 and 722 or 723 and 724.
Thi6 i6 expressed ~8:
Lo~ L
Hence, the multi-level signal transmis~ion ~y~tem of ~he embodiment is based on Lo>L. The embodime~t i~ however not .imited to Lo~L and L=Lo will be employed temporarily or 2~ permar.erltly depe~ding on the reQuirements of design, condition, and setting.

ThlE! two 6ig~al point groups are a6signed one-bit 9:~

... . ~

CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 pattern~; of the fir6t data stream D1, ~6 ohown in Fig. 59(a).
More particulQrly, a bit 0 of binary system is assigned to the fir!;t signal point group 725 and ~nother bit 1 to the second signal point group 726. Then, a one-bit pattern of the second cLata stream D2 is assigned to each signal point. For example,the two signal poi~t6 721, 723 are as~lgned D2=0 and the other two signal points 722 and 724 are as6i~ned D2=1.
Those a~e thus expressed by two bits per ~ymbol.
The! multi-level 6ignal tran6mission of the present invention can be i~plemented in A~ ASE mode with the ~e of the foregoing signal point as8ignment. The ~y~tem cf the pre6ent invention ~orks in the ~ame m~nner as of a conventi.onal equaL signal point dist~nce technique when the ~ign~l t.o noise ratio or C/~ rate ls high. If the C/N rate becomes low and no data c~n be reproduced by the conventional techniqLIe, the present ~y6tem ensures reproduction of the f ir6t data stream D1 but not the second data stream D~. In ~ore detail, the state at a low C/N is shown in Fig. 60. Ihe 6ignal points transmitted are displaced by a Gaus~ia~
distrib~t on to r~nge6 721a, 722a, 723a, 7Z4a respectively at the receiver 6ide due to noi~e and trans~ission distortion.
Therefore, the di6tinc~ion betwQen the two sign~ls 721 and 722 or '723 and 724 will hardly be e~ecuted. In other words, the error rate in the secord data ~tream D2 will be increas~d. As appar~t from Fig. 60, the two signal points 721, 722' are easily distinguis~ed from the other two signal points 723, 724. The disti~c~ion between the two ~ignal point 9~

- CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 ~

groups ,'25 snd 726 can thus be carrie~ out wlth ease. As the result, the first ~ata stre~m Dl will be reproduced at a low error rate.
Aclordingly, ~he two different level data Dl and D2 can be tran~cimitted simulta~eou61Y. More particularly, both the fir~t a~d ~tecond data stream6 Dl and D2 of a given signal trQnsmitted through the multi-level transmission system can be reproduced at the area where the C/N rate i~ high and the first data stream Dl only can be r~produced in the srea where ~hP C/~ rate is low.
Fig. 61 is a block dia~ram of ~ transm~t*er 741 in which an input unit 742 comprises a first data 6tream input 743 and a ~econcldata stream input 744. A carrier wave from a carrier generator 64 i6 amplitude modu'ated by a multiplier 74~ u~ing an i~put; ~i~nal fed across a proces~or 745 ~rom the input unit 743. The moduiated signal is then band limited by a filter ~747 to sn AS~ 6ignJ~l of e.g. VSB ~ode which is then delivered from an output unit ~48.
Thc~ wA~eform o~ the AS~ ~ignal afte~ filtering will now be e~am;ned. Fig. 62(a) shows ~ fre~e~cy spectrum of the ASK
modulate:d signal in which two ~ideb~nds are provid~td on both sides of ~he csrrier frequency band. One of the two sidebands is elimiT~ated with the filter 47~ to produce a si~nQl 74 which ct~ntains a carrier component ~s shown in Fig. ~2(b).
~5 The ~ignal 74g is a ~SB ~ignal and if the modulation frequency bsnd is f~, will be transmitted in a frequency band of about fo~2~ Hence, the frequency utilization becomes high.

J ~ t~=~ ~--'~ ~~~ CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 ~~ ~ '~

Using V~;B mode transmission, the ASK signal of two bit per symbol shown in Fig. 60 can thus carry in the frequency band an amount of data equal to that of 16 QAM mode at four bits per symbol.
Fig. 63 is a bloc~ di~gram of a receiver 751 in which an input si~n~l intercepted by a terrestrial ~ntenn~ 32a i8 transferrPd through an ~np~t unit 752 ~o a mi~er 753 where it i8 mi~ed with a signal fro~ a vari~le 06cillator 754 control].ed by channel selecti~n to ~ lower medium ~requency signal. The sig~al from the mi~er 753 i-s then detected by a detectol~ 755 and filtered by an LPF 756 to a baseband sign~l which is transferred to a discrimin~ting/reproduction circuit 757. Th~ diserimination/reproduction circuit 757 reproducel3 two, ~irst D1 and second D2, data streams from the b~seband aign~l f~d transmit thom fur~her through a first 758 ~nd a i;econd d~ta stre~m output 75~ respectively.
The tra~smissio~ o~ a TV 6ign~1 using such a transmitter and a receiver will be explained. Fi~. 64 is a bloc~ diagram of a vicLeo signal tr~lsmitter ?74 in wh;ch a high resolution T~ signal, e.g. ~n ~DTV signal, is ~ed through an input unit 403 to ,i~ divider cir~uit 404 of a first video encoder 401 where if; is divided into four highjlow ~reque~cy TV sign~l components denoted by e.g. H~VL, HLvl~, H~VL, and H~V~. This action is identical to that of the third embodiment previoui31y described referring to Fig. 30 u~d wili no ~ore be e~plained in detai}. The ~our separate TV signals are encoded respectively by a compressor 405 using ~ known ~8 , . . .

- : 7 ; - ;~ 2-CA 0 2 2 2 6 4 8 9 19 9 8 - 0 3 - 17 DPC~DCT variable length code encoding tech~ique which i co~mo~Lly used e~g. 1n MPEG. Meanwhile, tha motion CompensE~tiO~ of the sign~1 is carried out at the lnput unit 403. Th~3 compressed signal6 are 6ummed by a ~um~er 77~ to two, first and second, dat~L streums Dl, D2. T~Le low frequency video ~ign~l co~ponent or HLVL signal is co~tained in the fir6t dEIta stream ~1 The two data ~tream signals Dl, D~ are then transferred to a first 74~ ~Lnd a second data stre~m input 744 of ~ trarLsmitter unit 741 where they are ~Lmplitude modulatl~d and ~ummed to an AS~ 6ign~Ll of e.~. VSB mode which is propag~ted from a terrestrial ELntenna for broadcast ser~ice.
Fig. 65 is a block diagram of a TY receiver fGr such a digital TV broadcast system. A digit~l TV signal interceptod by a t~!rres~rial anten~a 32a is fed to an input 752 ol a receiver. 781. The slgnal is then traDLsferred to a detectionJdemodulation circuit 760 where a desired chAnnP
signal is 6elected and demodulated to two, first and se~ond, data stream~ D1, Da which are then fed to a first 758 an~ a secondllata stream output 75~ respectively. The action in the receiver unit 751 is similar to that d~scribed previously and will no more be e~plained in detail. ~he two data streams D1, D2 are sent to a divider u~it 776 i~ which D1 is divided by a di~ider 777 into two components; one or compressed ~LVL
2~ is tran~ferred to a first input 521 of a second video decoder 422 ancL the other is ~ed to a summer 778 where it is summed with Dz prior to transfer to a second input 531 of the se~ond ~ CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 ~-ideo decoder 422. Compre~fied HLV~ is then sent from the fir6t input 521 to a firGt e~pander 523 where it is e~panded to HLVL
of the original length which is then transferred to a video ~i~er 54,8 ~Lnd an a3pect ratio changing circuit 779. When the 5 input T~ signal i6 an ~DTV signal, HLVL represent, a wide-scree~ ]:~TSC 6ignal. Wher~ the B~e iS an NTSC ~ignal, HLVL
represe.llt6 a lower resolutior. video sigral, e.g. MPEG1, ~hat an NTSC level.
Th~ input TV signsl of the embodiment iB a~ HDTV ~ign~l 10 and HLVL beco~es a wide-screen NTSC sigrLal. It' the a6pect ratio ~f an av~ilabie displ~y is 16:9, ~LV,~ is directly deliverl~d thro~gh ~n output unit a~ a 16:9 vidao output 426.
If the displ~y has an aspect ratio of 4:3, HLV~ i~ ,hifted by the aspect ratio changing circuit 779 to ~ letterbo~ or sidepanlel format and then, delivered from t~.e output unit 780 as a corresponding for~t video output 425.
Th.e second datu ~tream Dz fed from the secorLd data stream output 759 to the summer 778 i~ swmmed with the output oi the divider 777 to a ~um signal which i6 then fed to the second input 531 of the second video decoder 4Z2. The s~m signal is further transferred to a divider cir~ult o31 while it i~ diYided into three compressed forms of HLVH, H~VL, ~nd H~V~. The three compressed 6i~nals are then fed to a 6econd 535, a third 5~6, and a fourth e~p~lder 537 respectively for converl~ing by e~pal~sion to HlV~, H~VL, aud ~V~ ~f the origi~al length. The three signals are 6ummed with HLVL by the video mixer !;48 to a composite HDTV !~-,ign~l ~hich i6 fed through an .- _L ~ 3 ;~ r, _, ~'~~ e'~~CA 02226489 l998-03 l7 o~tput 546 of the second video decoder to the output unit 780. ~i~1ally, the EDTV signal is deliver~d from the outp~t unit 780 a~ an HDTV video signal 427.
Thls output unTt 7~0 i~ arranged for detecting ar. error rate i~. the second data stre~m of the second d~ta stream output 759 throu~h an error rate detector 782 ~nd ir the error r~te is high, deliveri~ ~LVL of low resolution video data ~yetematically.
Accordingly, t~e multi-level si~nal trans~i~io~ sy6tem ~or digital TV 6ignal trsn6miYsion and recept~on ~ecomes feasible. For e~ample, i~ a TV signal transmitter st~ti~n is near, both ~he firet and second datQ 6trea~ o~ a received signa1 can 6ucce~6fully ~e reproduce~ to e~hibit an HDTV
qualit~ pictUre. I~ the trans~itter ~tation is far, th~ first 1~ data stream can ~e reproduced to HLVL which i8 converted to a low re~olution TV p cture. ~ence, any TV program will ~e i~tercepted in a wider area and displayed at a picture quality rsng.ing ~rom HDTV to NTS~ level.
Fis. 66 is a block diagram showing another arrangement ZO o~ the TV receiver. As ~hown, the receiver unit 751 con~-ainc only ~ 'Eir~t data 6trsam output 768 and thus, the proce6Sing of the second data strs~m or HDTV data is not ~eeded BO that the overall con6t~uction can be mirimized. It is a good idea to hsvi3! the first video decoder 421 shown in Fig. 31 a~ a video decoder of the recei~er. Accordingly, an NTSC level picture will be reproducea. The receiver i6 ~abricated at much le66 c06t as having no capabilitY to receive any HDT~

, lûl ~=~CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 '' -~

level slgnal and will widely be accepted in the D~rket. Ir.
brie~, the receiver can be used a~ an adapter tuner for interc~ption of a digital TV signal with gi~ing no modific~t~on to the e~isting T~' sy6tem including a displSLy.
T~ TV receiver 781 may have a further ~rrangement shown in Fig. 67, which serves a~ both a ~atellite broadcast recei~er for d~ -~nlation of PS~ ~ignal~ and a terrestrial broadcc~3t receiver for demodulation of AS~ 6ig~al6. In action, a PSE sig~al received by a ~atellite Qntenna 32 iB
mi~ed by R mi~er 786 with a sign~l ~rom an o~cillator 78~ to a low frequency sig~Lal which is the~ fed through an input UrLit 34 to a mi~er 753 ~imilar to one 8hown in Fig. B3. The low frequency sigDLal ~f PSE or QAM mode in a gi~en çhAn~l of the sat,ellite TV system is tran~ferred to a modulator 35 1~ where t:wo data 6treams Dl ~nd D2 are reproduced from the ~ignal, Dl and Dz are serLt through a divider 788 to a second video decoder 422 where they are converted to a video signal which i8 then delivered fro~ ~n output unit 780. Also, a digital or analogue terrestrial TV signal intercepted by a terre6tri~1 antenna 3Za is fed through an input unit 752 to the mi~er 753 where one desired channel i6 selected by the same man~er as described in Fig. 63 arLd detected to ~ low frequency b~se band signal. The signal of amLlogue form is sent directly to the demodulator 35 ~or demodul~tion. The signal of digital form i8 then fed to a discriD~ination~reproducing circuit 757 ~-here two data streQm~
Dl and D2 are reproduced from the signQl. Dl and DZ are -CA 02226489 1998-03-17 _ ~~ ~'~

converted by the 6econd video deeoder 4ZZ to ~ video 6igna~
which i~ then delivered further. A satellite analogue TV
signal .is tr~nsferre~ to a video demodulator 7&8 where it iS
AN modu1ated to an analogue video signal wh}ch is then delivered from the output unit 780. A~ ur~derstood, the mi~er 753 of the TY receiver 781 shown in Fig. 67 is arranged compati!ble between two, 6atellitu a~d terreetrial, broadcast ~ervice,~. Also, a receiver circult including ~ detector 755 and an I.PF 756 ~or AM modulation of nn analogue signal can be utilizel~ compatible with a digital AS~ 6ignal of the terrectrial TV ~erVice. The mQ~or part o~ the ~rrange~ent shown in Fig. ~7 is arranged for compatible uAe, thus minimizing B circuitry con6tructior~.
According to the e~bodime~t, a 4-level A,SK sig~al is divided into two, Dl and D2, level co~ponent~ ~or e~ecution of the o~e-bit mode multi-level cignal ~r~ncmisS~on. I~ An 8-le~el ASK 6ignal is used as chown in Fig. 6R, lt can be transmiXted i~ a one-bit mode three-level, Dl, D2, and D3, arrange~nent. A shown in Fig. 68, D1 i6 as6igned to eight Z0 6ign~1]?oints 721a, 7Zlb, 722a, 722b, 723a, 723b, 724a, 724b, each pn:ir representing a two-~it pattern, D2 i~ ~ssigned to four sm~all signal point groups 721, 722, 723, 724, each two groups representing ~ two-bit p~ttern, and D3 i6 as6igned to two l~rl~Se ~ignal point group6 725 and 726 repre6en~ing a two-~it pPt~ern. More par~-icul~rly, this i5 equi~alent to a fo~m in whic~ each of the four ~ig~al points 721, 722, 723, 724 shown in Fig. 57 is di~id~d into two components thue ~- CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 ~ ~ ''~

producillg three different level data.
The three-level ~ig~al transmi S9 i on ls identic~l to that describe~d in the third embodiment and will no further be e~plainod in detail.
S In particul~r, the ~rrangement of the video encoder 401 of the third embod~ment ~h~wn in Fi~. 30 i~ replaced with ~
modifica~ion of which block diagram is Fig. 69. The OperatiGn of the modified arrangement i9 simiiar and will no longer be e~plsim~d in det~il. Two video 8ign~1 divider circuits 404 ~nd 404~1 which may be ~ub-band filter~ are provided forming a divider ur~it 7~4. T~e divider unit 794 may al80 be arra~ged more sill3ple a ~hown in the bloc~ diagrum of Fig. 70, in which a signal passes across one sign~l divider circuit two times at tilDe divi~ion mode. More ~pecifically, a video 6ignal of e.g. HDl~ or 6uper HDTV from the input unit 403 i~ time-base compres~3ed by a time-base compressor 795 and fed to the divider circuit 404 where it i~ divided into ~our component~, H~V~-H,I~QVL-H, and ~LV~-H, and H~L-X at a first cycle. At the time, fo~r switches 765, 765a~ 766b, 765c rem~in turned to the pol~ition 1 so that H~V~-~, H~V~-H, and HLVU-~ are tranfimi~ted to a compres~ing circuit 405. Me~nwhile, ~VL-H
is fed t~ack through the terminal 1 of ths switch 76~c to the time-b~e compre6sor 795. At ~ second cycle, the four s~itches 7B5, 765a, 765b, 765c turned to the position 2 and Z~ all the four compone~ts of the divider circuit 404 are si~ul~aneo-lsly transferred to the compre~ing circuit 40~.
Ac~ordi.ngly, the divider unit 796 of Fig. 70 arranged for lC4 CA 02226489 1998-03-17 ~

time divi~ion pr~ces6ing Of ~n input sign~l c~n be con6tructed in a simpler dividirg circuit form.
At the receiver ~ide, ouch a video decoder as de6cribed in the third embodime~t and ~hown in Fig. 30 i~ needed for three-level tr~nsmis~ion of Q video ~ignal. More p~rticu,larly~ a third video decoder 423 i~ provided which contain.s two miXers 556 ~nd 556a of different processing capability a8 shown in the block di~gram of ~ig. 71.
Also, the third vi~eo decoder 423 may be modified in which t,he same actio~ i~ e~ecuted with one si~gle mixer 556 as show~h in Fig. 72. At the first timing, five switches 76~, 765a, 'T65b, 7B5~, 765d remai~ tur~ed to the position 1, ~ence, H~VL, HLV~, H~Vr ~ and ~Ve are fed from ~ first 522, secord 5~2a, a third 522b ~nd a fourth expsnder 522c to through their respective switches to the mi~er 55~ where they are mi~:ed to a 6ingle video signal. The video signal which represents HIVL--H of an input high re~olution video 6i~nal is theu fed back thro~gh the termiral 1 o~ the ~witch 7B5d to the ter~inal 2 of the swltch 765c. At the ~econd timing, the 2~ four ~wltchee ~65, 765a, 765b, 765c ~re turned to the point 2. Thu~l, ~V~-~, ~VL-H, HLVH-E, and H~VL-H are transferred to the mi~Cer 556 where they are mi~ed to n 6ingle video signal which is t~en sent Qcross the terminal 2 o~ the 6witch 765d to the output unit 5~4 for further delivery.
Irl this ma~ner of time divisio~ processing of a Lhree-level laignal, two mixers can be replaced with one mixer.
Mc~re particularlY~ four c~mpon~nt6 ~lVL- ~LYH~ ~L~ ~HVH

.... .

CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 ~ ' are fed to produce HLVL-H at the f ~rs~ timing. Then, HLV~-H, V~-H, ~Lnd H~V~-H are ~ed at the second timing delayed from th f~r~lt timing ~nd mixed with ~VL-H to a target video ~ign~l. It is thus essential to perform the two aCtion~ at a~ islterval of time.
If the four components ~re overlapped each other or suppl iecl in a vari~ble eequence, they have to be time-base adjusted to a given sequence through u~ing memories accompa~lied with their respective switche~ 765, 765a, 765b, 765C. Ill the foregoing manner, a eig~al is trans~i~ted from the transmitter at two different timing periods as shown in Fig. 73 80 that no time-bage corltrolling cirruit is needed in the r~cE3iver which is thus arra~ged more c_ ~ct.

As shown in Fig. 73, Dl is the first data stream of a transmitting sig~al and HL~L, HLV~, H~, and ~V~ are transmitted on Dl ~hAnn~l at the period o~ ilr6t timing.
T~en, at; the period of second timing, XLV~, H~VL, and H~V~ are tra~smitted on Dz cha~nel. A~ the signal is transmitted in a time di~vi~ion sequence, the erLcoder in the receiver can be ZO ~rrnnged ~ore si~le.
The technique of reducing the number of the e~p~ers ;IL
the decoder will now De e~plained. Fig. 74(b) Ehows a ti~e-base asi3ignment of four dat~ components 810, 8~0a, BlOb, BlOc of a silgnal. ~hen other ~our data componerLts 811, 811a, 811b, 811c are inserted between the four data~ompone~ts 811, 811a, 811~, ~3,11c respectively, the l~tter Ca~L be transmitted ~t intervals of tlme. In action, the second video decoder 422 ~ CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 '~' ~ '~ ~~~
.

~how~ in Fig. 74(a) receives the four components of the first data 6i:ream D~ ~t a fir~t input 521 and tr~n~fer~ them througb~ a switch 812 to an e~p~nder 503 one after another.
More p~.rticularly, the component 810 first fed i8 e~panded 6 ~urin~ t_e feeding of the component 811 and after completion of proc:e~sing the component 810, t~e ~ucceedlng c~ nt 810a i8 fed. Hence, the e~psnder 50~ c~ proce~fi ~ row o~ the components ~t tlme intervals hy the same time divisioD manner as of the mi~er, thus 6ubstituting th~ sim~ltQneou6 actlon of a numbe!r of ~r~n~ers.
Fig. 75 ~8 Q time-base ~ssi~nment of data components of an HDT'i'sign~l, in which ~V~(1) of an NTSC compone~t of the first channel siglal ~or a TV progra~ i6 allocated to a data domain 821 of Dl sign~l. Also, ~LV~, ~YL, a~d ~V~ carrying EDTV QdLdition~l components of the first ~h~nn~1 signal are alloc~t,ed to three dom~ins 821a, 821b, 821c of D2 signal respect.ively. There are provided other d~ta c ~n~nt6 822, 82~a, E~22b, 822c bstwe~n the data compone~t6 of the fir6t eh~n~3 signal which can th~6 be e~p~n~e~ with an e~n~er circu1t during transmission of the other data. ~ence, all the data component6 of one channel s~gnal will be processed by a si~gle expander capable of operating ~t a higher speed.
Slmilar effect6 will be ensured by a~signment of the dats cc~mponents to other dom~ins 821, B21~, 821b, 821c a~
2~ shown in Fig. 76. This becomes more effective in tr~nsmission and reception of a con on 4 PSE or AS~ 6ignal having no differl~nt digital level~.

~ ~ - h ~ 02226489 1998 03-17 , --.

Fig. 77 show~ a time-base assignment of data co~ron~nts during physical two-level transmissi.on of three different ~ignal level datn: e.g. NTSC, HDTV, and ouper HDTV or ~ow resolution NTSC, 6tandard resolution NTSC, o~d HDTV. For e~ompleO for tra~smic~on of three data c. _~e~ts of low resolution NTSC, standard NTSC, and HDTV, the low re~olution NTSC or HLVL iB ~lioc~ted ~o th~ data domain 8~1 of Dl signal.
Also, H!,V~, ~V~, and ~Y~ of the 6tandard NTSC c ~u~~nt are al~ocatlE~d to three domain6 821a, 821b, 8~1c re~pectively.
10 HLVI~--lI, iE{~VL--H, and H~V~--H of the Hl)TV c, _ on~3nt ELre allocatud to domalns 823, 823a, and 823b re6pectively.
Th~E~foregoin~ assign~ent is a~sociated with such a logic level ~Lrr~nge~ent ba~od on discri~ination in the error correctiLon capability as de~cribed in the &econd embodimeut.
More particularly, HLVL i9 carried on D11 ~hAnn~l of the ~1 ~ignal. The D~ henn~l is higher i~ the error correction capability than D1_2 chan~el, A8 de3cribed in the second embodiment. ThP Dl_l ch~nnel i~ higher in the redundancy but l~wer irl the error rate than the Dl_2 chalmel ~nd the date 821 can be reconstruc~od at a lower CJ~ rate than that of the other clata 821a, 821b, 821c. More specifically, a low resolution NTSC co~ponen$ will be reproduced at a f~r locatio.ll from the transmitter antenn~ or in ~ sig~l attenuating or 6hadow area, e.g. the interior of a vehicle.
In vie~ of the error rate, the data 821 of Dl_l channel is les~ affected by signal interference than the other dat~
8~1a, ~21~, 821~ of Dl_2 rh~nnel~ while being specifically =L e-~~rCA 02226489 l998-03-l7 discrim.inated and stayed in a di~ferent logic level, as describ~d in the secon~ ~ ho~iment. While Dl and D2 are d~vided into two physlcally differe~t levels, the levels determined by dificrimination of the distance between error correcting codes are arrRnged different in the logic level .
The ~ r~llation of D2 data re~uires a higher C/~ rate than that for Dl d~t~. Ir. actio~, HLVL or low re~lution NTSC
signH1 can at lea~t be r~produced i~ ~ distant or lower C~N
6ervice area. ~L~ V~ d H~V~ can in addition be reprDduced at a lower C~N area. Then, at a high C/~ area, HLV~-H, E~:~VL-H, and ~V~-h' co~ron~ts ca~ a160 be reproducod to develop an ~DTV signal. Accordingly, three different leve1 broadca~;t ~ignals can be played back. This method ~llow6 tne signa1 r6ceivable area 6ho~n in Fig. 53 to increase from a double region to ~ triple region, as shown .n Fig. 90, thus en~urinf~ higher opportu~ity for enjoying TV programs Fi~,6. 78 is a ~loc~ diagram of the t~ird video decoder arrangecl for th~ time-base assi~nme~t of data shown in Fig.
77, whi~h i~ 6i~ilar ta that sho~n in Fi~. 72 e~cept that the third input 551 for D3 sig~al is eliminated an~ the arrangement 6hown ir. Fig. 74(a) is added.
In operation, both the D1 and D2 signals are fed through two inp~lt units 521, 530 respective~y to a switch R12 ~t the first ~ming. As their comporlent6 ir~cluding HLVL are tim~
~ivided, they are transferred in a ~uence by the swi~ch ~12 to an ~xpander ~03. This sequence will now be e~plained referri~lg to the time-base a6signment of Fig. 77. A

. ~ t ~
~ ~~A 02226489 l998-03-l7 compre~3ed form of R~V~ of the first ch~nn~l is first fed to the e~pander ~03 where it i 6 e~panded. Then, HLV~, H~VL, and ~V~ are e~p~nded. All the four ~p~nAed compoinents are sent through a switch 812a to a mi~er ~56 where they are mi~ed to produce HLVL-H. HLVL-H is t~en fed back from the terminal 1 of a switc~ 785a through the inpu~ 2 of a switch 765 to the H~VL
input o'f the mi~er 556.
A~ the second timing, ELV~-H, H~V~-H, and ~V~-H of the D2 si~nal l~hown in Flg. 77 ~re fed to the e~r~Pr 503 where they are~ expanded before transferred through the Ywitch 821a to the Dli~er 5~6. They are mi~ed by the mixer ~56 to ~n HDTV
siRn~l which is fed through the termin~1 Z o~ the switch 765a to the clUtpUt unit 521 for ~ur*her delivery. The ti~e - ba~e assignme:nt of data components fDr transmi~sion, 6how~ in Fig.
lB 77, cont;ributes to the simple~it arr~ngement of the e~pander ~nd mi~er. A1tho~gh Fig. 77 ~how6 two, Dl a~d D2, si8nal ~evels, four-level transmission of a TV signal will be fua~ibie ~ing the ~ddition of a D3 signal and a super resoluti.on EDTV signal.
Fig. 70 ill~strates a t~me-ba~e ~6signment ~f data components of a physic~l three-l~vel, Dl, D2, D3, TV signal, in which d~ta component6 of thP sQme channel are so arranged as not to overlap with one a~other with time. Fig. B~ is a block diaeram of a modified video decoder 423, si~ilar to 2B Fig. ~8, in which a third input 521a is added. The time-base as~ignm,2nt of data components shown in Fig. 79 Al~o ~cntributes to the simple construction of the decoder.

~10 CA 02226489 1998-03-17 ~ ~' T~re ~ction of the modified decoder 423 is al~ost identical io that shown in Fig. 78 and a660ciatet~ with the time-b~.se assignment shown in Fi~. '77 and will no more be expl~iDLed. It is also possible to multiple~ data c- ~n~entS
on t~e ]D1 signal as 6hown in Fig. 81. ~o~ever, two data 821 and 822 are increat~ed higher in the error correction cap~bility than other data components 821a, 812b, 812c, thus ctaying at a higher signal lev~l. More particularly, t~e data as~ignml2nt for tr~nsmi88io~ i8 made in one physicai level but 10 t~o lo~ic level rel~tionship. Also, e~ch d~ta compo~ent Of the sec:ond channel i~ inserted between two adjace~t data component6 of the first channel ~o that serlal ~roces~in~ can be.e~ec~ted at the receiver side and the same effects as of the tir:le-base assigr~nent shown in Fig. 79 will thus be 15 obt~ined.
The time-base ns~ignment of data components shown in Fi~. 81 i~ based on the logic level mode and c~n also be carried in the physical level mode wh~n the bit tran6mit~sion rate of the two data components 821 and 8Z2 i6 decre~6~d to l/2 or :Lf3 thus to lower the error rate. The physical level arrange~ent is consisted of thr~e di~ferent le~els.
Fig. 82 is a bloc~ diagrh~ of another modified video decoder 423 for decoding of the D1 sign~l time-bQse arranged as shown in ~ig. 81, which i6 simpler in con~truction than ~5 that sht~wn in Fig 80. Its action is identical to that of the decoder ~hown in ~ig. B0 and will be no more explained.
As understood, the time-base assignment of da~a , . . ~

c~mronent6 shown in Fig. 81 also contributes to the similar arrangement of the expander ar~d mi~er. Also, four data components of the D1 signal are fed at respective time slices to a mi~er 556. ~ence, the circuitry arrange~ent of the mixer ~56 or 1~. plur~lity of circuit blocks ~uch ~e provided in the video mi~er 548 of Fig. 32 may be arranged for cha~ging the connection t~erebetween corre~onding to e~ch data c~ ~ne~t so that they become compatibl~ in time division action and thus, m~nimiz~d in circuitry construction.
lOAcl~ordingly, the receiver can be minimized in the overall construction.
It would be. understood thnt the fifth embodiment iR ~ot limited to AS~ ~odulation and the other methods i~cludi~g PSK
and QAM modulation, ~uch as described in the ~irst, second, and third embodi~ent6, will be employed with equal ~ucces6.
Al~ilo, FSK modulation will ~e eligible in any of the embodime:nts. For e~ample, the signal point6 of a multiple-level ~9K ~ignal consisting of four frequency components fl, f2, f3, f4 are divided into groups ~ ~hown in Fig. ~8 and when the distance between anY two groups are spaced from esch other for ea~e ~f di~crimination, the multi-level tr~nsmi~3~6ion of the FSK signal c~n ~e impleme~ted, as illu6tr~-t~d in Fig. 83.
More p~rticularly, it i6 assumed that the frequency Z5group 84l of fl ~nd f2 is assi~ned Dl=0 and the group 842 of f3 and f4 i~ assigned ~1=1. If fl and f3 represent 0 at D2 and f2 and ~r4 represent l at D2, tw~-bit data tr~nsmission, one ... . ~

''' t~ C'CA 02226489 1998-03-17 ~~~- ~- -~

bit at Dl or D2, will be po6~ible a~ 6hown in Fig. 83. When the CJN rate ie high, a co~bination of D~=O and D2=1 i6 reconstructed at t=t3 ~nd a combination of D1=1 ~nd D~O at t=t4. When the C/N rMte i8 low, D1=O only i6 reproduced at t=t?~ aml Dl=l at t=t4. I~ this manner, th~ FSK signal can be tran~mt~i;ted in the multi-level ~rrangement. Thi~ multi-state FSK ~igl~al transmission is applicAble to each of the third, fourth, and fifth embodiments.
Thl.~fifth embodiment may also be implemented ln the form 10 of a mllgnetic record~playback app~r~tus of which block diagr~m ~hown in ~ig. 84 beC~U8e itB ASE mode uction is appropr.iate to magnetic record and pl~yb~ck operation.
Embodiment 6 A si~th embodim~nt of ~he pres~nt invention i8 applicable to a ma~netic r~c~rding and playbae~ app~ratus.
Although the above-described fifth e~bodiment ~pplie8 the present invention to a multiple-level recording ASK data tran~mi~;sion syt~tem, it is al~o feasible in the same m~nner to adopt thi~ invention in a magnetic recording and pl~yback apparat~l~ of a ~ulti-level AS~ recording system. ~ multi-level magnetic recording can be reulized by incorporati~g the C-CDM ~y~Btem of the pre~ent inventio~ to PSK, FC~, and ~AM, a~ well as AS~.
First of all, the method of realizing a multi-level Z5 recordir.g in a 16 QA~ or 3Z QAM m~gnetic recording playback apparatu6 will ~e e~plained wit~ refsrence to the C-CDM
system a,f the pre~ent invention. Fig. 84 i6 a circuit ~lock .~c-i-cA 02226489 l998-03-l7 diagralll showing a QAM s~ste~ incorporQting C-CDM modulator.
Hereim~.fter, a QAM sy~tem being multipl~ed ~y the C-CDM
mod~la1;or i6 termed a6 SRQAM.
A~;~hown in ~ig. 84, an input video ~ignQl, e.~. ~n HDTV
signal, to a magnetic recordJplayback apparatus 851 is dividecl and co~pressed by ~ video ~Incoder 401 into a low frequelLcy band signal through a first video encoder 40la and a hig~ frequency b~nd ~ignal t~rough a eecond video enccder 401b re6pectively. Then, a low frequency ba~d compo~t, e.g. HLl~L, of the video signal i8 fed to a first dnta stream input 743 of an input 6ection 74Z and a high frequency band component including ~V~ i8 fed to a 6econd data ~trea~ input 744 of the same. The two component~ are further tran~ferred to a mo~ulator 749 of a modulator/de~odulator unit 852. The 15 fir~t d~ ta stream input 743 ~dds an error correcting code to the Low frequency bnnd signal in an ECC 743a. On the other ha~d, t]he second d~t~ strr~m ~ed into the ~econd dat~ stre~m input 744 i~ 2 bit in case of 16 S~Q~, 3 bit in CQBe of 36 SRQAM, and 4 bit ir. ca~e of 64 SRlhM. After ar~ error correcting code being encoded Ln an ECC 744a, this 6ignal i6 ~upplied to a Trelli~ encoder 744b in which a Trellis encoded ~ignal ]:laving ~ ratio 1/2 i~ cas~ of 16 SR~AM, 2~3 in ca~e of 32 SRQAM, and 3/4 in case of 64 SRQAM i6 produced. A 64 SRQAM sign~l, for example, ~.a8 A first dat~ stream of ~ ~it and a 6~cond data stream of 4 bit. A Trellis encoder of Fig.
12~ allows this 64 SRQAM signal to perform Q Trelli6 encoding of ratio 3J4 whereir.3 bit data is converted i~lt~ 4 bit data.

~ rCA 02226489 l998-03-l7 ~~
~.

Thus redundancy increases and a data rate decrease~, while error correcting c~pabilitY increases. This results in the reduction of an error rate in the same data rate.
Accordingly, tr~nsmittsble information amount of the recordi~g/playback system or transmission sy6tem will increase ~ub6tantially.
It is; however, possible to con~titute the first data stream input 74~ to ex~lude a Tre~ e~coder as ~hown in Fig. 84 of this si~th embodiment bec~use the first data stream has low error rate inherently. This will be advanta~geous in view of simplification of circuit configurat~on. The second data strea~, however, has a narrow inter-cc)de di6t~nce a~ compared with the first data fitresm and, the~refore, has a worse error rate. The Trellis encoding 15 of the li;ec~nd data stream improve~ such a worse error rate.
It i6 no doubt that an overall circuit configuration ~ecomus simple if the Trellis encoding of the fir~ data strea~ is eliminated. An operatlon for modulation i6 almo~t identical to that of the tran6mit~er of the fifth embo~i~ent shown in 20 Fig. ~4 and will ~e no mo~e e~plained. A modulated signal oi' ~he mo~ lator 74~ i~ fed into a recording/playback circuit 853 in w-hich it i6 AC biased by a ~ia~ generator 856 and ~mplified by an amplifier 857a. Thereafter, the s;gIla- is fed t~ a ma~netic head 854 for recording onto a magnetic tape 855.
A format of the recording signal is shown in a recording ~ignal I-'requency assignment of Fig. 113. A main, e.g. 16 _ CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 .

SRQA~, signal 859 having a carrier of fre~uency fc record~
information, and al60 a pilot fp signal 85~a having frequer.lcy 2fc i8 recorded simultaneously. Distortion in the recording operation is lowered as A bias signal 859b havin~
a frequ~ncy f~I~ add6 AC bia~ for ~ag~etlc r~cording. Two of three-l~vel ~ignals ~hown in Fig. 113 are recorded in multiplle ~tate. In order to reproduce these recorded signals, two threshold~ Th-1-2, Th-2 are giv~n. A ~ignal 8S9 will reproduce ~ll of two level~ while ~ s~gnal 8~c will reproduce Dl d~ta only, dependin~ on the C/N level of the recordi]lg/playback .
A main signal of 16 SRQAM will have a sig~a~ point a~igD~nt shown in Fig. lO. Furthermore, a main signal of 36 SRQAM wlll have a signal point assignment ~hown in Fig. 100.
In reprclduction of this signal, both the main ~ig~al 859 and the pil~t signal 859a are reproduced through the ~agnetic head 854 and a~plified ~y an ampli~ier 857b. An output signal alf the amplifier 857b is ~ed to a c~rrier reprod~ction cir~uit 858 in which a filter 8~8a separate6 the ~requency of the pilot 6ig~al fp ha~ing a frequency 2fO and a 1/2 frequency divider 858b reproduces a carrier of frequency iO
to tran~ er it to a demodulator 760. ThL~ reproduc~d carrier i8 used to demodulate the main sign~l in the demodulator 760.
Assumin~ that ~ ~a8netic recording tape 855, e.~. ~DTV tape, ~5 ie o~ hi.gh C/~ rate, 16 signal poin~s are discriminatable and thus bo~h Dl and D2 are demodulated in the demodulator 760.
Subse~ue~ntly, a video decoder 402 reproduce all the signals.

._ CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 An HDTV VCR can reproduce a high bit-rate TV signal such as a 15 Mb]E~6 HDTV signal. The low the C/N rate, t~e cheaper the cost of a video tape. So fHr, ~ VE~ tape in the market i~
inferio~ more than lO dB in the C/N rate to a full-6cale broadca~3t tape. I~ Q video tRpe 855 iB of low C~N rate, it will ~ot be ~ble to di~criminate ~ll the 16 or 32 valued signal point~. Therefore the fir~t datQ stream Dl can be reprodu*ed, while a 2 bit, 3 bit, or 4 bit d~ta stream of th0 second dAta ~tre~m D2 c~n~ot be reproduced. Only Z bit data stream of the first data Btream i8 reproduced. If a two-level HI~TV video sign~l is recorded and reproduced, a low C~N
tape having insufficient capability of reproducing a high freque~c:y band video signal can output only a low rate low freq~en~:y band video sign~l o~ the fir~t data stream, 6pecifically e.g. a 7 Mbp6 wide NTSC TV 6ig~al.
As shown in a block diagram of F-g. 114, the eecond data stream c~utput 759, the second data stre~m input 744, and the second ~ideo decoder 402a can be elimi~ated in order to provi~e customers one aspect of lower grade product~. In this ca~ie, ~ recording/playback ~pparatu~ 851, dedicnted to a low bit rate, will inc;ude a rnodulator such as a modified QPS~ which ~odulatea and demodulate~ the ~irst data stream only. Tbi~ appQratus allows only the fir~t ~ata ~tream to be recordedL a~d reproduced. Specif.cally, a wide NTSC grade video signal can be recorded and I~eproduced~
Above-described high C/N rate video tape 8~5 capable of recordi~,g a high bit-rate signal, e.g. HDTV sig~al, will be - ~~CA 02226489 l99X-03 l7 ~

able to use in such ~ low bit-rate dedicated mag~etic recording/playbac~ apparatus but will reproduce the first d~ta stream Dl only. That is, the wide NTSC signal is outputted, while the second data ~tre~m is not repr~duced. In other words, one recording/~layback apparatus having a compl ic~ted config~ratio~ c~n reprodu~e ~ HDTV signal and the other recording/playback apparatus havi~g a si~ple coufiguration can reproduce a wide hTSC signal if a given video t~pe 85~ i~cludes the ~ame multi-level HDTV signal.
Accordillgly in case of two-level multiple state, four combinations will be realized with perfect compatibility among l;wo tape6 having different &/N rates and two record;ing/playback app~ratus having different recordi;rlg/playback data rates. This ~ili bring remarkable effect. In this case, a~ NTSC dedicated apparatus will be simple ;~ co~struction ag compared with an HD~V dedicated apparatlls. In more detail, a circuit scale of EDTV decoder will be 1/6 of that of RDTV decode~. Ther~f~re, a low functi~n apparatus can be reali~ed at fairlY low co~t.
~ealization o~ two, ~DTV and EDTV, types recording/playback apparatu6 having different recordingJreproducing cap~bility of picture qu~lity will provide vsrious type products ranging in a wide price range. ~sers can freely select a tape among a plurality of tapes, from an e~pensive high CJN rate tape to a cheaper low CIN rate tape, as occasion demands so as to satis~y required picture quality. Not only ~aiutaining perfect compatibility but obtaining expandable capability L c~ ~C 02226489 '' ~ ~~~ ~~~

will b,e attained ~nd further compatibility with a future 3ystem1will be ers~red. Con~eque~tlY. it will be po6sib1e to establi.sh long-lasting standard~ for recording/playback apparat,us. Other recording ~etho~s will be uHed in the s~me ~a~ner. ~or e~ample, a multi-level recordiAg will ~e realize!d by use of phaee modulation e~plained in the first and third embodiments. A recording using AS~ e~plained in the fifth embodime~t will al~o be po~ible. A multiple 6t~te will be reali7ed ~y converting pre6ent recording ~rom two-level to four-level and dividi~ into two groups ~8 shown in Figs. 59~c) ~nd 59~d~.

A circuit block diagram for ASX is identical ~o that disciosed in Fig. ~4. Besides embodiments already described, a ~ulti.-levol recording will be al~o realized by use of multiple tracks on a magnetic tape. FurtheF~ore, a theoreti~ul multi-level recording will ~e feasible by differe~tiating the error correctirlg capability 90 as to di~criminute re6pective data.
Col~patibility with future standard6 will be de6cribed below. 4 setting of standQrds for recordingJplayback apparatu6 such as VCR i~ normally e~ecuted by taking account of the ~[109t highe3t C~N rate tape available in practice. The recording characteristic~ of ~apes progre66e6 rapidly. For e~ample, the C~N rate has been improved more than 10 dB
co~pared with the tape used 10 years ago. If supposed that new standards will be established after ln to 20 years due to an adva~lr~ent of tape property, a conventional method will ~ - CA 02226489 1998-03-17 ~ ~

e~counter with difficulty in maintaining compatibility with older standsrd6. New and old ~tandards, in fact, u~ed to be one - w~y compatible or non-compatible with each o~her. ~ ~e contrary, in accordance with the present invention, the st~ndarl1~ are iirst o~ all e6~ablished for recording and/or reproducing the fir~t data stream and~or second data ~trc~m on pre~ent day tapes. Subsequently, if the C/~ rate is improv~d magnificen~ly in future, un upper level data ~tream, e.g. a third data stream, will be added without any difficulty a~ long as the preeent invention i6 incorporated in the sy~tem. For example, a super HDTV VCR capable ôf recording or reproduclng a three-level 64 SRQAM signal will be reall.zed while mainta~ning perfec~ compatibi}ity with the convent~onal s'and~rds. A magnetic tape, recording first to third data stream~ in compliance with new standar~6, will ~e able tc, use, of cause, in the older two-level magnetic recordi~tlg/playback apparatus capable of recording snd/or reproducing only first and second data ~treams. ln this ca~e, first alld second data str~am~ can be reproduc~d perfectly althoug]tl the third dats ~trs~m is left non-repr~duced.
Therefola, an HDTV signal c~n be reprodu~ed. For these reasons, the merit of expanding recording data ~mount while maintai~ning compatibility between new and old ~t~ndards is e~pe c teci .
Returning to the explanation of reproduci~lg operation of Fig. 84, the maglletic head 854 and the magnetic reproduction circuit 853 reproduce ~ reproducing signal from the magnetic q. ~

CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 tape 85!5 and feeds it to the modulation/demodulation circuit 852. The~ demodulating operation is almost ide~tical with that of fir~l;, third, ar~d fourth embodiments and will no further be e~pl,nined The ~ o~-llator 760 r~roduce6 the first and ~econd clata stream6 ~l and D2. The ~ecord data ~tream D2 i9 error corrected with high code gain i~ a Trellis-decoder 759b such ~B ~ Vitabi decoder, 90 as to be low error rate. The video docoder 402 demodulate~ D1 and D2 signals to output an HDTV video ~ignal.
Fil~. 131 is a ~loc~ di~gram ihowi~g a three-level magnetie recording/playback app~ratu~ in accord~nce with the pre~ent invention which includes one theoretical level in additio~lto two phy~ical levels. This ~ystem is ~ub~tantially the 6ame a~ that of Fig. 84. The di~ference is that th~ iirst data ~tream is further divided into two sllheh~nn~ls by use of a TDM il:! order to re~lize a three-level construction.
Ao shown in Fig. 131, ~n ~D~V signal i~ ~ep~ra~ed fir~t of all into two, medium ~nd low frequency b~nd video signal6 D1_1 and D1_2, through ~ 1-1 video encoder 401c and a 1-2 video encoder 401d and, thereafter, ~ed into a fir~t data ~tream input 743 of an in~ut section 742. The data stream D1_ having ~I. picture quality of MPEG grade is error correcting coded with high code gain in an ~CC encoder 743~, ~hile the d4ta stream Dl_2 is error correctlng coded with normal code gai~ iI~, an ECC encoder 743b. Dl-l and Dl-2 are time multiple~ed together in a TDM 743c to be one data stream D1.
D1 ~nd D2 are modulated into two-level fiign&l in a C-CDM 749 -r~ 02226489 and thlen recorded o~ the magnetic tape 8~5 through the meLgnetic head 854.
ID! playback operation, a recording signal reprod-~ced through the magnetic head 8~4 i8 de~odulated into D1 nrLd D2 by the C-CDM demodulator 760 in the same manner as in the e~plcnation of Fig. 84. The fir~t data ~tream Dl i~
demoduleLted irLto two, D;_l and Dl_2, ~ubchannels throu8h the TDM 758r provided in the first deLta 6treeLm output 7~B. Dl_l data i5 error corrsct~d irL anL ECC decoder 7~8a havlng high code gaJ,n. Therefore, Dl_l dateL can be demodulated at a lowur C/~ rat1~ a~ compared with Dl_2 data. A l-l video decoder 402a decode~ the Dl_l data and outputs arLLDTV ~ignal. On the other h~nd, Dl2 da~a is error corrected in ~ ECC decoder 758~
having rlormal code gain. Therefore, D~_2 data ha6 a thresho~d 15 value oi' high CJN rate compared with Dl_l data and thu~ will not be demodulated when eL 6ignal le~el is not large. ~1-2 aa~a 1~3 tnen aemoaulatecl ln ~ r-~: v~Ld~c~ cleGod~r ~0~ ~d 6ummed ~with Dl_l data to output an EDTV signal of wide NTSC
grade.
Z0 The~ second dELt~ ~tream D2 i6 Vitabi demodulated in a Trelli~ decoder 75~b ~Lnd error corrected at eLrL ECC decoder 759a. Thereafter, D2 data i8 converted into a high ~requency band video signal t~rough a second video dffcoder 40Zb and, then, ~l~mmed with Di_l and Dl2 dateL to output anL HDTV 6igrLal.
In this case, a thre~ho~d value of the C/N rate of D2 data i6 ~et lar;ger than that of C/N rate of Dl_2 data. Accordi~gly, Dl_l datEL, i.e ~n LDT~ signal, will be reproduced from a tape lZ2 = ~CA 02226489 1998-03-17 ' ' ~ ~ ~~

855 having a smaller C~h' rate. D1_1 and D1_2 data, i-e- an EDTV
signal, will be repr~uced from a tape ~55 havi~g a normal C/N ral;e. And, Dl_l, Dl_2, and D2 data, i.e. an HDTV sign~l, will be reprod~ced from a tap~ 855 having a high C/N rate.
Three-levelmagnetic recGrding/playbac~ apparatus can be realized in this m~nner. As described in the foregoing descri~tion, the tape 855 has an interrelation between C/N
rate an~d co~t. The prese~t invention allowB uBer~ to 6elect a gra~e~ o~ tape in accorda~ce with a content of TV program they w~3-nt to record because video 6ignals having picture qualities of threP grades can be recorded and/or reproduced in accc,rdanre with t~pe cost.
Ne~t, an e~fect of multi-level recording will be descrik,ed with respect to fast feed playbsck. As shown i~
a recorcling tr~ck dia~ra~ of Fig. 132, a recording track 855a having ,~n azi~uth angle A and a recording track 855b having au oppo~itu azimuth angle B are altern~tely srrayed on the magne~ilc tape 855. The recording track 855a has ~ recording region B55c at itA central portion and the remainder as Dl_2 recording regionfi 855d, as denoted in the drawing. Thi~
unique recording pattern i~ prov}ded on at least one of several recording tracks. The recording region 855c records one fra~e of LDTV signal. A high frequency band signal Dz is recorded on ~ D2 recording re~ion 855e correspondin~ to an entire recording region of the recording track 855a. This recordi~g format ca~es no no~-el effect against a normal speed recording~playback operation.

~ i ~ '~ ~ ~ =~~-CA 02226489 1998 03 17 ~ ~'~ ~ ~~

A fast feed reproauction in ~ reverse direction does not allow ~ magrletic head trace B55f havirlg an azimuth aD~le A to coincicle ~ith the magnetic track a6 ~howr. in the dr~wing. As the pre~ent invention provides the Dl_1 recordine reeion 855c at a central n~rrow region of the magnetic tape Q~ ehown in Fig. 13~, this region only i8 surely reproduced although it occur6~ith a predetermined probability. Thus repr~duced D1_ signa] can demodulate an entire picture plane of the ~ame time ~lthough its picture quality i5 an LDTV of MPEGl level.
Ir. thi~i ~anner several to several ten~ L~TV ~iguals per second can be reproduced with perfect picture image6 during the fa6t feed ~layback operation, thereby enabling u~ers to surely c~nfirm picture images during the fast feed operation.
A head trace 8~5g corresponds to a head trace ln the reverse playback operation, from ~hich it is understood only a part of the magnetic track i6 traced in the rever.~e playbac~ operation. The recording/playbac~ format ~hown in Fi~. l32 however allows, even in such a reverse playback operation, to reproduce Dll recordin~ region ~nd, therefore, an anim-~tion of LDTV grade is outputted intermittently.
Acl-urdingly, the prese~t invention m~kes it possible to record a picture image of LDTV grade within a narrow region on ~he recording track, which results i~ intermittent qual 7 ty of LDTV grade during normal and reverse fa~t feed pl~yback operations. Thus, ~he u~er~ can easily confirm picture ima~ed even in high-6peed searching.

. . ~

~ CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 ~ ~

Next, another method will be descri~ed to respond a higher Ispeed fast feed playback operation. A D1_l recarding region B55c i9 provided as 6hown at lower right of Fig. 132, so that one frame of LDTV ~i~nal is recorded thereon.
Furtherl~ore, ~ ~arrow Dl_l D2 recording region 855h i8 provided ~t a part of the Dl_l recording regiou 855c. A
subchamlel ~1-1 in this regien record~ & part o~ i~formati~n relati~l~ to th~ one fr~me of LDTV ~ignal. The remai~der ~f the LD~V information iR recorded on the ~2 recording region 855j of the D~ D2 recording reglon 8~5h in ~ duplicated manner. The subchan~el D2 ha6 ~ data recording capaeity 3 to ti~ei~3 a6 much ~s the 6Ubch~nn~l D1_1. Therefore, subch~nrl~l6 Dl_l and D2 can record one frame inform~tion of LDTV ~ nal on a smaller, lJ3-l~5, area o~ the recording tape. AE; the head trace can be rec~rded in a further narrower regionsl855h, ~55j, b~th time and area are decrea6ed into 1/3-l~5 a8 compAred with a head trace time T~. Even if the tr~ce oi head i6 further inclined by iIlcreasing the fast ~eed speed a~ount, the prova~ilitY of e~tirely tracing this region will be increa~ed. Accordingly, perfect LDTV picture imagea will be inteFmittently reproduced even if the f~t feed s~eed 16 increased up to 3 to 5 time6 ~s f~st a8 the ca6e of the subrh~nrlel D1_1 only-In c~se o~ a two-level VCR, this ~ethod is useles~ in reproducin~ the ~2 recordi~g region 855j and therefore thi 5 region will not be reproduce~ ~n ~ high-speed f~st feed play~ack operation. On ~he ~her hand, a three-level high _ CA 02226489 1998-03-17 perforr~snce VCR w;ll allow user~ to confirm a pictu,e Lmage even i~ a fast feed play~ack oper~tion is e~ecuted at faster, 3 to 5 as fa~t as the two-level VCR, s~e~d. In other words, not only e~cellent picture ~uality i8 obtai~ed in accordL~nce with cost but a maximum fast ~eed ~peed capable of reprod~lcing picture images can be incr~a~ed in ~ccordan~e with the co~t.
Although this embodiment utilizes a multi-level modulation sy~tem, it iB needle~6 to s~y that a normal, c.g.
lB QAM, modulation ~ystem can also be adopte~d to reallze the fast feed playback operation in accordance with the present invention a~ long as an encoding of picture images is of multipl,e type.
A recording method of a conve~tional non-multiple lS digital VCR, in which picture i~a~ec are highly compressed, disperh~es video data uniformly. Therefore, it wa- not po6sible in a fast feed playb~c~ operation to reproduce all the picture imageh on a picture plane of the ~e time. The picture reproduced was the o~e con6isting of plur~lity of picture i~age blocks h~ving ~on-coincided time base~ with e~ch ot.her. The present invention, however, provides a multi-l~ve' HDTV VCR which ca~ reprodu~ pict~re i~ag,e blocks having coincided time bases on an entire picture plane during a fast feed pl~yback operation altho;lgh itR plcture quality is of LD1~ ~rade.
Th,e three-level recording in accordance with the present invention will be able to reproduce a high resolution ~V

_ CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 signQl ~iuch as ~DTV signal when the recordingJplaybac~ system has a bigh CJN rate. Meanwhile, a T~ ~i~al of EDTV grade, e.g. a lwide NTSC signal, or ~ T~ signal of L~TV gr~de, e.g.
a low resolutio~ NTSC signal, will be reproduced when the recordi~g/playback ~y6tem has a low C/N r~t~ or poor fu~ctio~l As i~ de~cribed in the foregoing de6cription, the magnetic recording~playback apparatus in accordance with the present invention can ~eproduce picture images consisting of the 8am~F- content even if the C/N rate i~ low or an error rate is htgh~ although the resolution or the picture qua~ity i8 rélatively low odimi3nt 7 A seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described for execution of four-level video ~ignal tran~mi6sion. A co~bination of the four-l~vel signal transmission and the four-level video data construction will create l~ four-level signal service are~ ~iB shown in Fig. 91.
The four-level ~ervice are~ i8 consi6ted of, from innermost, a first 890a, a second 890b, a third 890c, and a fourth si~nal receiving area 8~0d. The met~od of ~eveloping such a four-~evel service area will be expl~ined in more de~ail.
The four-level arrangement can be implemented by using fo~r physically differe~t levels determined through modulation or four logic level~ defined by data discrimina~ion in the error correction capability. The former provides ,a l~rge difference in the C~N rate between two lZ7 w~

~ CA 02226489 1998-03-17 ' ~djacent levels and the C/N rate has to ~e increased to discri~linate all the four levelo from each other. The latter ;~ based on the action of demDdulation and a differenc~ in the C/l~r rate ~etwecn two adjacent levels ~hould ~tay at minimu~,. Hence, the four-level arrangement is best con~tru~ted using a c~mbination of two physical levels and two logic levels. The division of Q video signal into four sign~l ~evel6 will be ~Yplained.
Fig. 93 is a block di~gra~ of a div~der circuit 3 which compris~3s a video divider 8~5 and four compressor~ 405a, 405b, ~105c, 405d. The video divider 8~5 contain~ three divider~ 404~, 404b, 404c which are arranged identical to the divider circuit 404 of the first video encoder 401 shown in Fig. 30 and will be no more e~plained. An input video signal is di~ided by the dividers into four co~ro~ent6~ ~LVL of low resolution data, ~VE of high resolution data, and HLV~ and H~L for medium resolution datn. The re~olution of HLVL i half th~t of the original input 6ig~al.
Th~ input video sign~l is fir6t divided by the di~ider 404~ into two, hig~ an~ low, frequency band component6, each componel~t being divided into two, horizontal aDd vertical, 6egmentl3. The intermediate between the high and low frequency range6 is a dividing point according to the embodiment.
Hence, if th~ input video signal is an ~DTV ~ignal of lOOO-line vertLcal re601ution, ~LVL has a vertical resolution of500 lin~s and a horizontal resolution of a half value.
Each of two, horizontal and vertical, data of the low ~ ~~ ~ ~~ '~' ~~'CA 02226489 1998-03-17 ' - ~- ~ --~requenc~ co~ponent HLVL i~ further divided ~y the divider 404c into two ~requency band segments. Hence, an HLVL ~egment output i~ 250 line~ in the vertical r~solution and l/4 o~ the origina]L horizontal resolution. This out~ùt of the divider 404c which i8 termed as ~n LL sigr~al i8 then compressed by the compres60r 40Ba to a Di_1 signal.
Thle other three higher frequency segments o~ HLVL are mi~ed by a ~i~er 772c to an LH signal which i~ the~
compres~sed by the compressor 405b to a D1_a signal. The compre~ or 405b may be replaced with three compressors provided ~etween the divider 404c and the ~i~er 772c.
X.V~, H~VL,and H~V3 form the divider 404a are mi~ed by a mi~er 77'2a to an H~V~-H signal. If the i~put signal is ~-~ high as lO00 line~ in both horizont~l and vertical resolution, ~V~-E h,~l6 500 to lOOO lines of a horizontal and a vertical re~olut'Lon. H~V~-~ i6 fed to the divider 404b where ;t i8 divided again into four component~.
Si~ilarly, HLVL from the divider 404b has 500 to 750 lines c~f a horizontal and a vertical resolution and transferred a6 an HL signal to the compressor 405c. The other three ct3~ponent~, HLV~, H~VL, and HEV~, from the divider 404b have 750 to lO00 lin~s of ~- horizontal and a vert~cal resolut:ion Qnd ~r~ mixed by a mix~r 772b to an HH signal which lE; then compressed ~y the co~preisor 405d and delivered a6 a D~2 E~ignal. After co~pression, the HL signal i6 delivered as a D2_1 ~ignal. As the result, DL or Dl_1 carrie6 a frequency data of 0 to 250 lines, LH or D1_2 csrrie~ a ~ CA 02226489 1998-03-17 frequency data fro~ more than '50 line~ up to 500 lines, ~L
or D2_1 carries a fre~uency data of more than 500 lines up to 750 line6, a~d H~ or D2_2 carries a frequency d~ta of more than 750 li~es to lOOO lines so th~t the divider circuit 3 can provide a four-level sign~l. Accordingly, when the divider circuit 3 of the tr~nGmitter 1 shown in Fig. 87 i9 replsced with the divider circuit o~ Fig. ~3, the trans~ission o~ a ~our-level ~ign~l will be i~plemented.
The combination of multi-level dsta ~nd multi-level transmi6sion allows a video signal to be at steps declined in the p~eture quality in proportion to the C/N rate during tra~smi~ssion, thus contributing to the ~nlargement of the TV
br~adc~l~t service area. At the recei~ing side, the action of demodulation a~d reccnstruction is iden*ical to that of the second receiver of th~ second embodiment shown in Fig. 88 and will be no more e~plai~ed. In particular, the mixer 37 i8 modified for video ~ignal tran~mi~sion rather th~n data co unlcat;ion6 a~d will now be e~p7 sined in ~ore detail.
As de~cribed in the second embodiment, a received signal ~O a~ter dlemodulated and error corrected, i~ fed a6 a set of four calmponents Dl_l. D1_2. D2-1~ D2-2 to the m second receiver 33 of Fig. 88.
Fil~. 94 is a block diagram of a modified mi~er 33 in which r~ D1-2~ D2_1- D2_2 are ~xplained by their respective eIpanders 523a, 523b, 5~3c, 52gd to an ~L, und L~, an Hl" snd an ~H signal respectively which are equivalent to those described with Fig. 93. If the bandwidth of the input signsl ~ CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 is ~, ~,L ha~ a bandwidth of 1/4, LL+LH has a band~idth of 1/2, LL~LH~HL ha6 a bandwldth of 3~4, and L~LH+HL+HH has a b~ndwidth of 1. The LH signal i6 then divided by a divider 531a a~d mi~ed by a video ~i~er 548a with the I,L signal. An output of the video mixer 54Ba ifi tran6ferred to an HLVL
terminal of a video mi~er 548c. The video mi~er 531a i6 id~ntic~l t~ that of the second decoder 527 of Fig. 32 ~nd ~G ~U U~Ui'0 08pl~ o ~i~ ~ hy a divider 531b and fed to a video mixer 548b. At the ~ideo mi~er 54~b, the HH eign~l is mixed with the HL si~nal to àn H~Y~-H si~gnal which is the~ divided by a di~rider ~3~c and 6ent to the lrideo mixer 548c. At the video mi~er 54~c, ~V~-H i~
combine~ ~ith the sum signal of L~ and LL to a video output.
The video output of the mi~er 33 i~ then tr~nsferred to the 1~ outputlL~nit 36 of the ~econd receiver shown in Fig. 88 where it i6 calnverted to a TV signal for delivery. If the original 6ignal has 1050 lines of vert~c~l re~olution or is an EDT~
eign~l of about 1000-line resolu'ion, its four different si~nal l~vel components can be intercepted in their re~pecti~e signal receiving areas shown in ~ig. 91.
The picture quality of the four different component~
will be described in more detail. The illu~tration of Fig. ~2 represellts a combination of Figs. 86 and 91. As apparent, when the C,JN ra~e increases, the overall signal level of amount IDf data is increased from 862d to 862a by steps o~
four 6ignal levels ~ 2~ D2-1~ D2-2' Al~o, as shown in Fig. 95, the four dif~erent le~el . CA 02226489 1998-03-17 co~ponents LL, L~, HL, and H~ are accumulated in proportion to the C/N rate. More specifica1ly, the guality of a reprodured picture will b~ incre~Yed ~s the distance from a tran~mitter antenna becomes s~all. When L=Ld, LL component i6 6 reproduced. When L=Lc, LL+L~ ~ignal is reproduced. When L=Lb, LL+LHI~L signal is reproduced. When L=La, LLILH+LL+HX signal iS rePI"OdUCed. AE the result, if the b~ndwidth of the origi~a.L ~ignal i8 1, the pict~re quality i~ e~h~red at 1/4 incre~e~tfi of bandwidth from l~4 to l depending on the receivillg area. If the ori~innl sign~l $~ an HDTV of lO00-line vertical resolutiun. a reproduced TV sign~l ie 250, 50D, 750, ~nll lO00 lines in the resolution at their respective recei~i~lg ureas. The picture quality will thus be varied at step~ depending on the level of a signal. Fig. 96 shows the signal propagation of a conventional digital HDTV signal tranemilssio~ ~yct~m~ in which ~o cienal reproduction will be ~06sible when the C/N rate iEi less than V0. Also, signal interception will hardly be guaranteed at ~ign~l inter~erence regions, shadow regiona, and other eignal attenuating regions, denoted by the ~ymbol ~, of the service area. Fig.
97 sha,ws the signal prcp~Eation o~ an HDTV 6ignal transniisi~n 6yEten1 of the ~ressnt invention. AB BhOWn, the picture quallty will be a ~ull lO00-line grade at the distance La where C/N=a, a 750-li~e grade at the distance Lb Z5 where C/N=~, a 500-line grade at the distance Lc where C~N=c, and a 2~0-~ine grade at the distance Ld where C/N=d. Within the diEitance La, there are ~hown unfavorable regions where the C/N rate drops 6harply and no HDTV qual~ty plcture will be reyroduced. As understood, Q lower picture quality signal c~n however be intercspted and reproduced according to the multi-].evel signQl transmigsion system of the pre6e~t $nventi.o~. ~or e~ample, the picture quality wi~l be a 7~0-line grade at the point B i~ a building shadow area, a ~50-line gr~de ~t the point D in a runnin~ t.rain, a 750-line grade aLt the point G in a r~nning car, a Z50-line grade at the poi.nt L in a neighbor 6i~nsl inter~ere~ce ~rea. A8 6et forth ~bove, the signal tranemission system o~ the pre~ent inventi.on allows a TV signal to be ~uccessfully received ~t a grade! Ln the area where the conventional 6ystem i6 poorly quali~ied, th-ls increa~ing its service area. Fig. 98 shows ~n e~ample! of simultaneous broadca6ting of four di~ferent TV
progr~m6, in which three quality programs C, B, A are transmi.tted on their respecti~e channels D1_2, D2_l, D2_2 while a progr~m D identical to that of a loeal analogue TV station is propagated on the Dl_l channel. Accordingly, while the program D is kept available at 6imulcast ~ervice, the other three p~rograme can also be di6tributed on air fGr offering a multip].e pr~gram bro~dcast ~ervice.

Embodiment ~
Hereinafter, an eighth embodiment of the pre6ent invention will be explained referring to the drawing6. The eighth embodiment employ6 a m1~1ti-le~el signal tran6mi66ion s~6tem of the preoent invention for transmi6sion/reception in e _ ~ ~~CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 a cell~.lar telephone system.
Pil~. 115 is a block diagram showing r transmit.ter/receiver of ~ port~ble ~elepho~e, in which a telepho3le co~versation sound inputted across a microphone 762 5 iB co~pressed and coded in a compresr~or 405 into multi-level, Dl, ~z, {Ind D3, data previously d~cribed. These Dl, D2, and ~3 data are time divided in a time division circuit 7~5 into predete~:~ined time slots and, then, modul~ted in a modulator 4 into a multi-level, e.g. SRQAM, signal previou~ly describl~d. There~fter, Qn antenna ~hrlring unit 764 and an antenna 22 trans~it a carrier wave carrylng a mod~ated signal, which will be intercepted by a base station later de~cribi3d and further tr~nsmitted to other base stations or a centr~,l te}ephone e~changer s~ a6 to communicate with other telephones.
On the contrary, the ~ntenna 22 receives transmission radio w~-ves from other base qtations a6 c. ication ~ignals from ot]rler telephones. A r~ceived signal is ~- ~l~lated in a multiple-le~rel, e.g. SRQAM, type demodulator 45 into Dl, D2, and D3 dLatA. A timing circuit ~67 detscts timing signaLfi on the bas.i.~ of de~odulated signals. The6e timing ~ignals are fed intc~ the time division circuit 7&5. Demodulated ~ignals Dl, D2, ,Emd D3 are fed into an e~p~nder 503 and e~panded into a sound signal, which is then transmitted to a spea~er 763 rnd converted into sound.
Fig. 11~ show~ Q block diagral exemplarily showing an arrange~ent o~ base stations, in which three base stations - CA 02226489 1998-03-17 ~ ~ -'' 771, 77Z, and 7~3 locate ~t ce~ter of re6pective receiving cell~ 768, 769, and 770 of he~agon or circle. These base stations 'i'71, 772, a~d 773 re~pecti~ely has a plurality of transmitte~r/receiver units 761a~761j each si~ilQr to that of Fig. 115 60 as to have data com~unicatio~ cha~nel~ equivalent to the nul~ber of these tranRmitter/receiver units. A base station calntroller 774 ~s connected to all the ba~e station~
~nd alwsyo mo~itors a co~u~ication tra~fic a~ount of each ~ase statio~. Ba~ed on the ~onitoring re~ult, the base station co,ntroller 774 carries out ~ overall sy~tem control includl~g allocation of c~annel frequencies to respective base ~tatiions or control of receiving cells of respecti~e base ~tati.ons.

Flg. 117 is a view showing a traffic di~tribution of 15 communiCaltion amount in a conventional, e.g. QPSK, system.

A diagram dcA shows data 774~ and 774b havinE~ frequency utilizaticln efficiency 2 bit/Hz, and a diagra~ d=~ shows data 774c havi:~lg frequency utilization e~ficie~cy 2 bitJHz. A
~u ation o~ these data 774a, 774b, and 774c beco~es a data 774d, wh.i.c~ represents a transmission amount of Ach consisting of receiving cells 768 and 770. Frequency utiliz~tic~n efficiency of 2 bit~Iz i8 uniformly distributed.
However, density of population in an actual urban area is locally hïgh in several crowded areas 775a, 775b, and 775c 2~ which inolude buildings concentrated. A data 774e repre~entïng a co~unication traffic amount shows several peaks at locations JUSt corresponding to these crowded areas CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 '~' ' 775a, 7'75b, and 77~c, in contrast with other area having ~mall communication a~ount. A capacity of a conventional cellular telephone wa9 uniformly set to 2 bitl~ frequency ef~icie~lcy at entire region as shown by the dat~ 774d irrespelct~ve ~f actual ~raffic amount TF shown by the data 774e. ]:t is not effective to give the 6ame fre~uency efficierlcy reg~rdless of actual traffic amount. In ordor to compensl-Lte this ineffectiv~ne~fi, th~ convention~l ~y~tem~
have al]ocated many frequencie~ to the regions having a large traffic ~mount, increased ch~nnel number, or decreased the receivine cell of the same. However, an increase of ch~nnel number is restricted by the frequencY spectrum. Fur*hermore, conventlonal mul~i-level, e.g. 16 QAM or ~4 QAM, mode tran~mir:~ion sy~tem~ incre~se transmission ~ower. A
reducticln of receiving cell will induce an increase in number of base OEtations, which will increase lnstallation ~ost.
It is ideal for the improvement o~ an overall ~y~tem ef~iciellcy to increase the frequency eEficiency of the region having eL larger tr~ffic amount and d~crease the frequency efficiel~cy of the region having a smaller traffic ~mount. A
multi-l~alvel ~ignal transmiscion system in accordance with the present invention realizes this ideal modificMtion. Thi~
will be e~plained with reference to Fig. 118 6howing a communiration amount & traffic distribution in accordsnce with the! ei~hth em~odiment of the present invention.
Mo:re specifically, Fig. 118 shows co~unication amounts of resplE~ctive receiving cells 770b, 768, 769, 770, and 770a .. . ..

t ~ a ~ r~-e,~
-~ CA 02226489 1998-03-17 ~ ~'~ ~~~

-taken a].ong a line A-A'. The receiving cells 76B and 770 utilize fre~uencie~ of a cha3~nel group A, while the receivin~
cells 7'10b~ 7~9, ~nd 770a utilize freQuencies of P cha3lnel group B which does not overl~p with the channel group A. The base station controller 774 shown in Fig. 116 increa6e6 or de~reas~e!6 chalnel number of the~e ch~nnel~ in accordance with the traific amount of re~pectlve receivlng cells. I~ Fig.
118, n diagram d=A represents a di~tribution of a communic~tion amou~t o~ the A cha3mel. A dia~ram d=B
repr~S~rLts a distribution of ~ communication amount of the B
channel. A diagram d=A+B represents a dis~ribution of a co3nmunic:ation amount of all the chan3nele. A di~gr~m TF
rcpreserlts a communicati~n traffic amount, nnd n diagr~ P
shows a distribution of buildings and population.
L5 The! recelving cQll~ 768, 769, and 770 employ the multi-level, e.g. SRQAM, ~ignal transmis6ion system. Therefore, ~t i6 possible to obtain a frequency utilization e~ficiency of ~ bit/Ha,, three times a6 large as 2 bit/Hz of QPSK, in the vicinity~ of the ba~e stat~ons as denoted by d~ta 776a, 776b, and 776c:. Meanwhile, the fre~uency utilization efficiency dscrea6~E~s at steps from 6 bitJH~ to 4 bit/Hz, And 4 bit/Hz to 2 bit/Hz;, as it goes to fiuburban area. If the transmission power i!E; insufficient, 2 bitJHz areas ~ecome narrower than the rece~iving cell~, denoted by dotted lines 777a, 777b, 777c, of QPS~. However, an equivale3~t receiving cell will be easily obtained by slightly increasing the tr~nsmission power of the base ~tations.

~ C~~--CA 02226489 ~'' ~ ~ ~ --Transmitting/receiving operation of a mobile ~tation capah1e of reepo~ding to a 64 SRQA~ sig~l is carried out by use of n~odified QPSE, which i6 obtained by set a ~hift amount of S~QAM to S=l, at the place far from the baee station, by use of :L~ SRQAM ~t the pl~ce not ~o far from the ~m~, ~d 64 S~QAM llt the nearest place. Accordingly, the ~a~imum transmi~sion power doe~ not increase ~6 compared with QPSK.
Furthermore, 4 SRQAM type tra~mitter/receiver, whose circuit configuration i8 simplified a6 shown in a block diagr~m of Fig. 121, will be able to c_ icate with other telepholles while maintaining compatibility. That will b~ thc same in 16 SRQAM type transmitter/receiver shown in ~ block diagram of Fig. 122. Ae a result, three different type telephone~ havin~ di~ferent modulation system6 will ~e provide,d. Small in size and light ln weight i~ lmportant for portable~ telephones. In thic regard, the 4 S~QAM system having ~1 simple circuit configuratio~ will be suitable for the u~ers who wQnt a 6m~11 and light telephone although it6 frequenl1y utiliz~tion efficie~cy i8 low and therefore C09t of call may increa~e. In thi~ manner, th~ present invention system can suit for a wide variety of usage.
As i~ esplained above, the transmi~ ion s~Btem having a distributio~ like d=A+B o~ Fig. 118, who~e capQc;ty is lorally altered, is accompli~hed. Therefore, an overall frequency utili~ation efficiencY will be much effectively improved if layout of base station6 ~6 determined to fit ~or the actl~al traffic amount denoted by TF. Especially, effect ~~~' ~'ff-t~- 02226489 l998-03-l7 1~ - J ~ J ' of the present invention will be large in a micro cell system, whose receiving cells are ~maller and therefore numerou~s; sub ba~e station6 are requir~d. Becau~e a large number c,~ cub base stations c~n be ea~ily installed at the place having a large traffic amount.
Ne~ct, data as6ign~ent oi each time slot will be e~pIairLs~d refsrring to Fig, 119, whereln Fig, 118(a) shows a convent.'ional time slot and Fig. 119~b) show~ a time 810t according to the eighth ~bodi~ent. The convention~l sy8tem performt; a down, i.e. from a base ~tation to a mobile 6tation" trarLsmi~610n as shown in Fig. ll9~a), in which a fiync ~ignal S i8 transmitted by a time slot 780a and tran~ sion ~ig~als to re~pective portable phones of A, B, C chAnnels by time slots 780b, 780c, 780d respectively at 16 frequency A. On the other hand, an up, i.e. from the mobil st~tlon ~o the buse gtation, ~r~nsmi6sion i8 performed in such a m~anrLer that a fiync signal S, and tran6mis~ion signal~
o~ a, b, c chanrLels are tr~Lnsmit~ed by time slot6 781a, 781b, 781c, 7~1d at a ~reque~cy B.
The present inventlon, which i~ characterized by n multi-lev~l, e.g, 64 SR4AM, signal trarL6mission system, allow6 t:o have three-level dat~ consigting of Dl, D2, D3 of 2 bit/Hz CL6 shown in Fig, ll9(b). As both of Al and Az data are transmi~,ted by 16 SRQAM, their time slot6 have two times data rate as shown by slots 7B2b, 782c and 783b, 783c. It means the samle quality 60und can be transmitted ~y a hal~ time.
Accordillgly, a time width of re~pective time sLots 782b, 782c becomes a half. In thi6 manner, two time6 transmi~sion -~pacity can be acquired at the two level region 776c shown i~ Fig llB, i.e in the vicinity of the base station.
Il~ the same way, time slots 7~2g, 783g carry out the S transm.is~io~/reception of El data ~y use of a 64 SRQAM
signal~ As the transmi66ion c~pacity i~ three times, one time sl.ot can be used for three channels of E1, E2, E3. Thi~
would ble u6ed for a region further clo~e to the bas~ ~t~tion.
Thu~1 up to three times c~ ication capacity c~n be obtain~d at the s~me frequency band. An actual tran6mi~sion ef~ici~!ncy, however, would be reduced to ~O%. It is desirable for enhAnci~g the e~fect of the pr~sent invention to coincide the transmission amount distribution according to the present invention with the regional distribution of the l6 actual traffic amount as perfect as pos~ible.
In. ~sct, an actual urban are~ con~ist~ of a crowded buildin~ di~trict and a green~elt zone s~rrounding thi~
b~ildin~ area. Even an ~ctu~l ~uburb area consists of a re~idantial di6trict and fields or a ~ore~t fiurrounding this re6idenl;ial district. The~e urban and ~uburb ~re~6 re~emble the dislt,ribution of the TF diagram. Thus, the app~ ication of the prelE;ent invention will be effective.
Fi~. 12~ i6 a diagram showi~g time slots by the T~MA
method, wherein Fig. 120(a~ ~how~ a convention~l method and Fig. l21;1~b~ shows the present inventiou. The conventional method use6 time slots 786a, 786b for tran~mission to portable phones of A, B char~els ~t the s~me frequency and --~ CA 02226489 1998-03-17 '" ~
_.

time ~ilot~ 787a, 787b for tr~nsmis~ion from the same, ss shown in Fig. 1~0~a).
On the contrary, 16 SRQAM mode of the prese~t invention use6 a time slot 788~ for reception of Al channel and 8 time 5 slot 788c for transmission to Al ch~nel Q~ chown in Fig.
lZO(b). A width of the time ~lot becomes sppro~imately 1/2.
In ca~le of ~4 SRQAM mode, ~ time slot 788i i8 used for reception of Dl channel and a time slot 7881 is ueed ~or transmission to ~1 channel. A width of t~e time ~lot becomes appro~.imately 1/3.
Ill order to save electric power, a tr~nsmission of El channe] iB e~ecuted by u~e of Q norm~l 4 SRQAM time ~lot 788r while receDtion of El channel is e~ecuted by use of ~ 16 SRQ~M l;ime 610t 788p being a 1/2 time slot. Trans~is6ion power .iB ~urely su~pres6ed, although c ic~tion cost may increa~ie due to a loDg occupation time. Thic will be effecti.ve for a ~m~ll and light portabIo telephone equipped with a 6msll battery or when the battery i8 almost worn out.
As; is des~ribed i~ the for~going description, the pre6ent invention makes it po66ibls to deter~ine the distriblution of transmi6sion capacity so as to coincide with an ac~;u~l tra~fic di6tribution, thereby lncreasing 6ubstaDtial tra~smission cQpaCity. Furthermore, the present invention allow6 base station~ or mobile 6t~ions to freely select~3ne among two or three tra~smission capacities. I~ the frequency utilization efficiency is s~lected lower, power consumption will be decrea6ed. If the frequency utilization efficiency is selected higher communication cost ~ill be saved. Moreover adoption of a 4 S~QAM mode having ~maller capacity will simplify the circuitry and reduce the size ~nd cost o~ the telephone. As explai~ed in the previous embodi~eut6 one characteristi~ of the pre~ent inve~t~ on i6 th~t c:ompatibility i6 mai~tai~ed ~mong all of associated statio~ls. In thia manner the pre~ent inven~ion not only increalies transmission capacity but allows to provide custo~E~r~ a wide variety of series from a s~per mini 10 telephr.~ne to a high performance telephono.
Embod i ~ n t Hlareinafter a ninth embodiment of t~e present in~ention will be described reierring to the dr~wing~. The ninth embodiluent employs this invention in an OFDM transmission 15 6ystem. Fig. 1~3 ic a block diagram of an OFDM
trsnsmi.tter~receiver, and Fig~ 124 is a diagram ~howing principle of an OFDM action. An OFDM iB one of FDM and ha6 a better eff~ciency in freque~cy utilization as compared with 8 genéral FDM, because an OFDM sets adjacent two cQrriers to be quadrature with each other. Furthermore an OFDM can bear multipath obstruction such as ghost and, thereforc, u~y be applied in the future to the digital music broadcasting or digital TV broadcastin~.
As shown in the principle diagr~ of Fi8. 124, an OFDM
Z5 convert~ an input signal by a serial to parallel co~verter 791 into a data betng dispose~ on a frequency a~is 793 at intervals of lfts 60 as to produce subohPnnels 794a~794e.

CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 Thi6 oignal i6 inversely FFT converted by a modulator 4 having;~n inver6e F~T 40 into Q ~i~nal on a time a~ls 799 to produc~ a tran6~is~ion sign~l 7a5. T~i6 inverse FFT 6ignal is tran~itted during an e~fecti~e symbol period 796 of the time period ts. A guard interval 797 having an amount tg i8 provide~d between re~pecti~e ~ymbol period6.
A transmitting/receivin~ ~ction of an HDTV ~ignal in accordance with thi6 ninth embodiment will be e~pl~ined referr.i.ng to the block diagram of Fig. 123, which sho~s a hYbrid OFDM-CCDM system. An inputted ADTV signal is 6eparat.ed by a video encoder 401 into three-level, a low freque~3cy band Dl_l, a medium-low frequency b~nd Dl_z~ n~d a high-m~dium-low fre~uency band D2, video 6ign~16, and fed into an input section 742.
IrL ~ fir6t data fitre~m input 743, a Dl_l signal i~ ECC
encodcd. with high code gain and a Dl_2 signal is ECC encoded with normal c~de gain. A TDM 743 performs time division multipl~ing of Dl_l and D1_2 signals to produce ~ Dl signal, which il3 then fed to a Dl oerial to parallel converter 7~1d 20 in a modulator 8$2a. The Dl si~nal consi6ts of n piece6 of paralle:L ~ta, which are inputted into first inputs of n pieces of C-CDM modulator 4a, 4b,---respectively.
On the other hand, the high frequency ~nd 6ignal D2 i5 fed intcl a second data ~tream input 744 o~ the input section 742, in which the D2 signal i6 ECC (Er~or Correc~ion Code) encoded in an ECC 744a and then Trellis encoded in a Trelli~

encoder 744b. Therea~ter, the D., 6ignal i6 supplied to a D2 ~ CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 ~ J-serial to parallel converter 791b of the modulator 852a and converted into n pieces of par~llel d~ta, which are inputted into second inpu~s of the n pieces of C-CDM modul~tor 4a, 4b,~ nespectively.

T]:le C-CDM modulators 4a, 4b, 4c---re6pectively produces 16 SRC~IM signal on the basie of the Dl data o~ the fir~t data stream input and the D2 data of the ~econd data ~tream input.
The6e Ll piece~ af C-CDM nodulator re~pectively ha5 a carrier different from each other. As shown in Fig. 124, carrier8 794a, 7~4b, 794c,---are nrrsyed on the freguency a~i8 793 80 that acljacent tw~ carriers are 90~-out-of-pha6e with each other. Thu6 C-CDM modulated n pieces of modulated signal are fed in1;o the inverse FFT circult 40 and ~apped fro~ the fre~uen~cy ~i6 dimension 793 to the time a~i6 dimension 790.
T~us, ti.me ~ignal~ 796a, 796b ---, having an effect~ve ~ymbol le~gth t~, ~re produced. There i~ provided ~ guard interv~l zone 79'?a of Tg ~econd~ between the effectivu symbol time zones '796~ and 796b, in order to reduce multipath o~struct;ion. Fig. 129 is a graph ~howi~g Q relationship 2U between time a~is and signal level. The g~ard time Tg of the guard i3:1terval band 797a i6 determined by taking account of multipa1th affection and usage of signal. By 6etting the guard time Tg longer th~n the multipath affection time, P.g. TV
ghost, modul~ted signals from the inverse FFT circui~ 40 are converted by a purallel to serial ~onverter 4e into one ~ignal a,nd, then, transmitted from a transmitting circ~it 5 a~ an RE~ ~ignal.

-- CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 l~est, an action of a receiver 43 wlll be described. A
receilred si~nal, shown as time-base 6ymbol sig~al 7~6e of Fig. 124, i6 fed in~o ~n input circuit 24 of Fig. lZ3. Then, the r~!ceived 6ignal iB converted into a digit~l signal in ~
demodulator 8~2b and further ch~nged into Fourier coefflcient~ in an FFT 4~a. Thus, the Bignal i6 m~pped from the time axi~ 79Y to the fre~uency aIifi 7~3a as shown in Fig.
124. 'r.hat l~, the time-base symbol si~nal i~ converted into frequency-~a~e carriers 7~4a, 794b,---. As the~e carriers are ir~L qu~drature relationship with each other, it is possible to separate r~spective modulated oignals. Fig.
125(b) shows thus demodulated 1~ SRQAM signal, which ie then fed to respective C-CDM demodulatorR 45a, 45b,--of a C-CD~
demodul.ator 45, in which demodulated 16 S~QAM si~al i8 demodulated into multi-level 8Ub signQls D1, Da~ T~ese sub signal2~ ~l ~nd D~ are further demodulated by a Dl parallel to serial converter 852a and a D2 parallel to se~ial converter 852b into the original Dl and Dz hignals.
Since the signal transmis~ion system is of C-CDM multi-level l3hown in 125(b), both Dl and D2 signals will be demodulated under ~cttur receivi~g condition ~ut only D
6ig~al will be demodulated under worse, e.g. low C~N rate, receiving condition. De~odulated Dl ~ignal is demodulated in an Outpllt section 757. As the D~ ignal ha6 higher ECC code gain as co~pared with the Dl_2 signal, an error slgnal of the D1_l signal is reproduced even under ~orse receiving conditi~n.

~ CA 02226489 1998-03-17 The Dl_1 signal is converted by a 1-1 video decoder 402c into a low fre~uency band sign~l ~Id outputted as an LDTV, ~nd t]:Le D1_2 signal i~ converted by ~ 1-2 video decoder 402d into a medium freque~cy b~nd signnl ~nd outputted as EDTV.
1~'he D2 signal is Trelli~ decoded by a T~ellis decoder 7~9b and converted by a second video decoder 402b into a high frequelncy band oignal ~nd outputted as an HDTV ~ign~l.
Namely, an LDTV 6ignal i~ o~tputted in ca~e of the low frequency band signal only. An EDTV signal of wide NTSC
10 grQde i8 outputted if the medium frequency b~nd 6ignal i~
added l~,o the low frequeLcy band signal, ~nd an HDTV signal i8 produc~d by adding low, medium, and ~igh frequency band 6ignal.s;. As ~ell a~ the previous embodiment, a TV signal having a picture quality depending on a receiviDg C~N rate can be received. Thus, ths ninth e~b~diment r~alizes a novel multi-].evel ~ignal trsnsmi~6ion sy6tem by combining an OFDM
and a C - CDM, which was not obtained by the OFDM alone.
AIl~FDM is certainly strong again~t multipath such as TV
ghost because the gu~rd time Tg c~n sbsorb an interfere~ce signal of multipath. Accordingly, the OFDM ie applicable to the digital TV bro~dcas~ing for ~uto~otive vehicle TV
receivers. Meanwhil~, r~o OFDM ~ignal is~ r~ceived when the C~N
rate is less thun a predetermined v~lue because its signal tranemission pattern is not of a multi-level type.
Z5 However the present invention can solvc thi6 di6advantage by comblning the OFDM with the C~CDM, thus realizing a grQdition~l degradatlon depending on the C/N rate - CA 0:226489 l998-03-l7 ' ~~~~ ''; ~'--in a video sig~al rQceptiOn without being di6turbed by mu].tipath.
~ hen a TV s~gnal i9 received in a comp~rtment of a vehicle, not only the reception i8 di~turbed by multipath but ~he C:~N rate i6 deteriorated. Therefore, the broadca6t servit:e area of ~ ~v broadca~t station will not be expanded a~ e~jpected if the countermeasure is only for multipath.
On the other hand, a reception of TV signal of at leact LDTV g;rade will be ens~red by the co~bination with the multi-level tran9mission C-C~M even if the C~N rate is fairly deteri.orated. A~ a picture plane size of an automotive vehicl.e TV i~ normally le6s than ~OO inches, a TV signal of an LD1~ grade will provide a sati6f~ctory pict~re quality.
Th~s, the LDTV grade service are~ of auto~otive vehicle TV
will :l~r~ely expanded. If an OF~M i6 used in an entire freque~1cy ba~d of HDTV ~ignal, the present semiconductor techno.Logie~ cannot prevent circuit scale from increasing ~o f~r.
Nl~w, an OFDM method o~ transmltting only D1_1 uf low frequency band TV signal will be e~plained ~elow A~ sho~n in a bloc:~ diagram in Fig. 138, a medium frequency band compone~nt Dl_2 and a high frequency band component D2 of an ~DTV signal are multiple~ed in a C-CD~ modulator 4a, ~nd then transmiitted At a frequency ba~d A thrDugh an FD~ 40d.
OII the other hand, a signal received by a recei~er 43 is first of all ~re~uency separated by an F~M 40e and, the~, demodul.ated by a C-CDM demodulator 4b of the pre6ent CA 02226489 1998-03-l7 inverltion. Therea~ter, thus C-CDM demoduluted ~ignal is reprolduced i~to me~ium and high frequency components of HDTV
in the same way as in Fig. lZ3. An operation of a video decoder 40Z is identical to that of embodiment8 1, 2, and 3 ~nd w.Lll no more be e~pl~ined.
~ eAnwhi1e, the D~ ign~l, a low fre~uency band signal af MPE:G 1 grade of HDTV, is converted by a serial to ~ralIel ~onverter ~91 into a p~r~llel signAl and fed to ~n O~DM
modulator 852c, which e~ecutes a QPSK or 16 QAM modul~tion.
Subseq~entlyJ the D1_1 signal is conv~rted by an inv~rse FFT
40 into a time-base ~ign~l a~d transmitted at a frequency band B through the FDM 40d.
~ the other hand, a signal rece~ved by the receiver 43 i8 frequency separated in the FD~ 40e and, then, converted into a l1umber of frequency-base ~ignal~ in an FFT 40a of the OFDM mo,dulator 852fi. Thereafter, frequency-b~se signal~ are d~ lated in respective demodulator6 4a, 4b,---~nd are fed into a parallel to sericl converter 882a, wherein a D]_ signal i.8 demodu~A-ted. Thu~, a Dl_l 8ign~1 of LDTV ~rade is outputted from the receiver 43.
In thi~ ~anner, only ~n LDTV signal is OFDM modulat~d in the multi-level signal tran~mi6sion. T~e ~y~tem oi Fig . 138 makes it pos6ible to provlde a complic~ted OFDM c~rcuit only for a~ LDTV signal. A bit rat~ of LD~V signal is 1/20 of that Z5 o~ ~n ~DTV. Therefore, the circuit scale of the OFDM will be reduced to 1/2~, ~hich results in an outst~n~in~ redu~tion of overaLl circuit scale~

- CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 An OFDM ~ignal transmission system is ~trong against ~ultipath and will soon be ~ppl ied to a mobile station, ~uch ~s a portable TV, an automotive vehicle TV, or ~ digital mu~ic broadcast receiver, which i8 exposed under strong and variablle multi~ath cb~truction For ~uch u~age~ a s~alt picture size of le6s than lO incha~, 4 to ~ inches, is the mainstrea~. It will be thu~ ~ue~sed that the OFDM modulation of a high resolution TV signal such as HDTV or EDTV will brin~ les6 effect. I~ other ~ords~ the reception of a TV
sign~l of LDTV grade would be ou~fic~ent for an ~utom~tive vehiclle TV.
Orl the contrary, multipath is con~tant at ~ fi~ed statioll ~Uch as a home TV. There~ore, a countermeasure ~gainst multipath i6 relat~vely e~sy. Le66 effect will be ~S brough1; to 6uch a fi~ed statton by OFDM unles~ it i6 in a ghost area. Using OFDM for medium and high frequency band c. E- ~t~ of HDTV i8 not ad~ntageous in view of present circuit ~cale of OFDM which i~ still l~rge.
Ac~ordingly, the method of the pr~sent invention, in ~hich O~DM i8 used only for a low ~requency band TV ~ignal as ~hown in Fig. 138, can widely reduce the circuit ~cale of the OFDM to le6s ~-han l/lO without 105ing inherent OFDM e~fect capable o~ lar~ely reduci~g mul~iple obstruction o~ LDTV when received ~t a mobile ~tation such as an automotiva vehicle.
All;hough the OFDM modulation of Fig. 138 is per~ormed only for Dl_l signal, it iB also possible to mo~ulate both Dl_ and Dl_l by O~DM. In ~uch a cfise~ Q C-CDM two-level ~ignal 14~

~~- CA 02226489 1998-03-17 tranEImission is used for trQn6mission of Dl_l and Dl_2. Thu8, a mu:lti-level br~adcastin~ being strong agsinst multlpath will ~e realized for a vehicle 8uch a~ an aUtomotive vehicle.
Even in a vehicle, the graditionQl graduation will be 5 reali.zed in such a manner that LDTV and SDT~ ~ign~l~ ~re recei-~ed with picture qualities depending on receiving fiignal level or antenna ~en6itivity.
The multi-level signal transmi~ion accordin~ to the p~e~ent invention i6 fea~i~le in thi~ manner a~d produces VariOUS effects a6 previou~lY described. Furthurmore, if the multi-leve} signal tra~8mi6~iorl of the present i~ventio~ is incorporated with an OFDM, it ~ill become po6sible to provide a syEItem strong against mult~path a~d to alter data trans~lission gr~de in accordance with receivable signal level change.
The multi-level ~ignal tran6mission method of the pre~ent in~ention i8 intended to increase the utilization of freque~lcies but may be suited for not all the trarsmis6ion ~ystem~ since causing ~o~e type receiver6 to be declined in the em~rgy utilization. It i6 a good idea for use with a eatellite com~unic~tions ~ystem for selected subscribers to employ mo6t adva~ced transmitters ancl receivers deslgned for best utilization of applicable freciuencie~ a~d energy. Such a specific purpose signal transmission system will not be bound hy *he present invention.
The present invention will be advantageous for use with a 6ate!~lite or terrestria1 broadcast 6ervice which is - CA 02226489 1998-03-17 "' ~

e6sential to run in the same standards for a~ long 88 50 years. During the 6ervice period, the ~roadea6t standar~fi must not be altered but improve~ent~ will be provided time to time corresponding to up-to-date technological achievements, Partic~ularly, the energy for 6ignal tran~mi~6ion will s~rely be increased on any satellite. ~ch TV ~tation 6hould provide ~ com~patible ~ervice for guQrn~teeing TV program ~ignal recepl;ion to any type receivers rangirLg from t~d~y' 9 C~
ones to future advanced one6. The 6ign~1 tran6mis~ion system of the pre~ent invention c~n provide ~ compatible bro~dcast 6ervice of both the e~isting NTSC ~nd ~DTV systems ~rLd al50, ensure a future extenBion to matc~L mass dat~ t~ansmi66ion.

T~Le present invention concerns much on the frequency utilization tlLsn tlLe energy utilization. The si~n&l receivi~

~erLeitivity of each receiver i8 arra~ged different depending on a signal state level to be received so that the tr~nsmLtting power of a tr&nBmitter needs not be i~cre~ed 1ar~el~r, Hence, e~isting s~tellite~ which offer a small energy for reception and tran6mi~6ion of a signal can best be used wi.th the 6y~tem of the pre~ent invention. The 6y8tem is al60 arranged for performing the same sta~Ldards corresponding to an i.ncrease in the trarL~mission energy in the future and offeri~lg the co~patibility between old and new type receivers. In addition, tke preserLt InverLtion will be more advantageous for u~e with the ~atellite broadcast s~andard6.
The multi-level signal tran~mission method of the present,invention i~ more preferably employed for terrestri~l lSl ; CA 02226489 l998-03-l7 ''~

TV broadca~t cervice in which the energ~ ut~lization is not crucial, ~s compared with 6atellite bro~dca~t service. The re~ults ~re such that the 8ignBl attenuating regions in a servil-~ areo ~hich ~re attributed to Q conventional digital HDTV ~roadca6t sy~tem are considerably r~duced in e~ten~ion ~nd al~o, the comp~tibility of an ~DTV receiver or dioplay with t;he e~isting NTS~ ~ystem is obt~ined. Furthermore, the 8er~ic~e area iB substantially increased so th-t progro~
suppliiers and sponsors can appreciate more viewer~. Although the embodiments of the prese~t inventio~ refer to 16 and 32 QAM procedure~, other modulation tech~iques including 64, 128, and 256 ~AM will be employed with equal succes~. A~so, multiple PSK, ASK, and FS~ techni~ues wlll be epplicable us described with the embodiment~.
A combination o~ the TDM with the SRQAM of the present invention has been described in the aoove. However, the SRQAM
of th~ present in~ention con ~e combined nlso with any o~ the FDM, C]'lMA and freq~ency dispersal communicAtions ~y6tems.

Claims (9)

1. A transmitting apparatus comprising:
a trellis encoder for receiving an input signal and trellis encoding said input signal to obtain an encoded signal;
a carrier generator for generating a carrier signal having a carrier frequency;
a modulating means for amplitude modulating said carrier signal by said encoded signal to produce an 8-value ASK modulation signal;
a filter for eliminating one of two side bands which exist on both sides of said carrier frequency in said 8-value ASK modulation signal to obtain an 8-value VSB modulation signal containing said carrier frequency; and an up-converter for generating a transmission signal based on said 8-value VSB modulation signal.
2. The transmitting apparatus in accordance with claim 1, further comprising a Reed-Solomon encoder for error correction encoding said input signal to obtain an error correction encoded input signal, said error correctionencoded input signal being fed to said trellis encoder.
3. The transmitting apparatus in accordance with claim 1, further comprising a video encoder for encoding a video signal to obtain an encoded video signal as said input signal.
4. The transmitting apparatus in accordance with claim 1, further comprising:
a video encoder for encoding a video signal to obtain an encoded video signal as said input signal; and a Reed-Solomon encoder for error correction encoding said input signal to obtain an error correction encoded input signal, said error correction encoded input signal being fed to said trellis encoder.
5. A receiving apparatus comprising;
a channel selector connected to a variable oscillator for changing a frequency of an oscillation signal of said variable oscillator;

a mixer connected to said variable oscillator for converting a received signal by using said oscillation signal into a 8-value VSB modulation signal;
a demodulator for demodulating said 8-value VSB modulation signal to reproduce an encoded signal; and a trellis decoder for trellis decoding said encoded signal to obtain a trellis-decoded signal.
6. The receiving apparatus in accordance with claim 5, wherein said trellis-decoded signal has been subjected to an error correction encoding by a Reed-Solomon encoding, and wherein said apparatus further comprises a Reed-Solomon decoder for error correction decoding said trellis-decoded signal.
7. The receiving apparatus in accordance with claim 5, wherein said trellis-decoded signal is an encoded video signal, and wherein said apparatus further comprises a video decoder for decoding said trellis-decoded signal to obtain a video signal.
8. The receiving apparatus in accordance with claim 5, wherein said trellis-decoded signal is an encoded video signal which has been subjected to an error correction encoding by a Reed-Solomon encoding, and wherein said apparatus further comprises:
a Reed-Solomon decoder for error correction decoding said trellis-decoded signal; and a video decoder for decoding an output of said Reed-Solomon decoder to obtain a video signal.
9. A communication system comprising a transmitter and a receiver, said transmitter comprising:
a trellis encoder for receiving an input signal and trellis encoding said input signal to obtain an encoded signal;
a carrier generator for generating a carrier signal having a carrier frequency;
a modulating means for amplitude modulating said carrier signal by said encoded signal to produce an 8-value ASK modulation signal;

a filter for eliminating one of two side bands which exist on both sides of said carrier frequency in said 8-value ASK modulation signal to obtain an 8-value VSB modulation signal; and an up-converter for generating a transmission signal based on said 8-value VSB modulation signal, and said receiver comprising:
a channel selector connected to a variable oscillator for changing a frequency of an oscillation signal of said variable oscillator;
a mixer connected to said variable oscillator for converting a received signal into a 8-value VSB modulation signal;
a demodulator for demodulating said 8-value VSB modulation signal obtained by said mixer to reproduce an encoded signal; and a trellis decoder for trellis decoding said encoded signal reproduced by said demodulator to obtain a trellis-decoded signal.
CA 2226489 1992-03-26 1993-03-25 Communication system Expired - Lifetime CA2226489C (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CA 2332405 CA2332405C (en) 1992-03-26 1993-03-25 Communication system
CA 2331203 CA2331203C (en) 1992-03-26 1993-03-25 Communication system

Applications Claiming Priority (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP6793492 1992-03-26
JP4-256070 1992-09-25
JP25607092 1992-09-25
JP4-67934 1992-09-25
CA 2092495 CA2092495C (en) 1992-03-26 1993-03-25 Communication system

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CA 2092495 Division CA2092495C (en) 1992-03-26 1993-03-25 Communication system

Related Child Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CA 2332405 Division CA2332405C (en) 1992-03-26 1993-03-25 Communication system
CA 2331203 Division CA2331203C (en) 1992-03-26 1993-03-25 Communication system

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
CA2226489A1 CA2226489A1 (en) 1993-09-27
CA2226489C true CA2226489C (en) 2001-07-24

Family

ID=26409144

Family Applications (4)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CA 2332405 Expired - Lifetime CA2332405C (en) 1992-03-26 1993-03-25 Communication system
CA 2331203 Expired - Lifetime CA2331203C (en) 1992-03-26 1993-03-25 Communication system
CA 2092495 Expired - Lifetime CA2092495C (en) 1992-03-26 1993-03-25 Communication system
CA 2226489 Expired - Lifetime CA2226489C (en) 1992-03-26 1993-03-25 Communication system

Family Applications Before (3)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CA 2332405 Expired - Lifetime CA2332405C (en) 1992-03-26 1993-03-25 Communication system
CA 2331203 Expired - Lifetime CA2331203C (en) 1992-03-26 1993-03-25 Communication system
CA 2092495 Expired - Lifetime CA2092495C (en) 1992-03-26 1993-03-25 Communication system

Country Status (12)

Country Link
US (7) US5819000A (en)
EP (21) EP0562875B1 (en)
JP (15) JP3109552B2 (en)
KR (1) KR960002468B1 (en)
CN (1) CN1032099C (en)
AT (20) ATE317193T1 (en)
AU (1) AU655539B2 (en)
CA (4) CA2332405C (en)
DE (19) DE69331853T2 (en)
DK (20) DK1039677T3 (en)
ES (20) ES2258181T3 (en)
PT (20) PT1039682E (en)

Families Citing this family (87)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
USRE39890E1 (en) 1991-03-27 2007-10-23 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Communication system
US5600672A (en) 1991-03-27 1997-02-04 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Communication system
USRE42643E1 (en) 1991-03-27 2011-08-23 Panasonic Corporation Communication system
USRE40241E1 (en) 1991-03-27 2008-04-15 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Communication system
US6728467B2 (en) * 1992-03-26 2004-04-27 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Communication system
US7158577B1 (en) 1992-03-26 2007-01-02 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Communication system
US5802241A (en) 1992-03-26 1998-09-01 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Communication system
CN1032099C (en) * 1992-03-26 1996-06-19 松下电器产业株式会社 System of communication
US6724976B2 (en) * 1992-03-26 2004-04-20 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Communication system
US7894541B2 (en) * 1992-03-26 2011-02-22 Panasonic Corporation Communication system
USRE38513E1 (en) 1992-03-26 2004-05-11 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Communication system
US7313251B2 (en) 1993-11-18 2007-12-25 Digimarc Corporation Method and system for managing and controlling electronic media
US6560349B1 (en) 1994-10-21 2003-05-06 Digimarc Corporation Audio monitoring using steganographic information
US7224819B2 (en) 1995-05-08 2007-05-29 Digimarc Corporation Integrating digital watermarks in multimedia content
US6760463B2 (en) 1995-05-08 2004-07-06 Digimarc Corporation Watermarking methods and media
US6965682B1 (en) 1999-05-19 2005-11-15 Digimarc Corp Data transmission by watermark proxy
US6411725B1 (en) 1995-07-27 2002-06-25 Digimarc Corporation Watermark enabled video objects
US7715446B2 (en) * 1996-04-25 2010-05-11 Digimarc Corporation Wireless methods and devices employing plural-bit data derived from audio information
US6320914B1 (en) * 1996-12-18 2001-11-20 Ericsson Inc. Spectrally efficient modulation using overlapped GMSK
US6501771B2 (en) 1997-02-11 2002-12-31 At&T Wireless Services, Inc. Delay compensation
US5933421A (en) 1997-02-06 1999-08-03 At&T Wireless Services Inc. Method for frequency division duplex communications
US6359923B1 (en) * 1997-12-18 2002-03-19 At&T Wireless Services, Inc. Highly bandwidth efficient communications
US6584144B2 (en) 1997-02-24 2003-06-24 At&T Wireless Services, Inc. Vertical adaptive antenna array for a discrete multitone spread spectrum communications system
US6408016B1 (en) * 1997-02-24 2002-06-18 At&T Wireless Services, Inc. Adaptive weight update method and system for a discrete multitone spread spectrum communications system
JPH1174861A (en) * 1997-08-27 1999-03-16 Sony Corp Radio communication system
US6438693B1 (en) * 1997-09-30 2002-08-20 Sony Corporation Modular broadcast receiver system and memo
US7689532B1 (en) 2000-07-20 2010-03-30 Digimarc Corporation Using embedded data with file sharing
TW432840B (en) * 1998-06-03 2001-05-01 Sony Corp Communication control method, system, and device
US6230162B1 (en) * 1998-06-20 2001-05-08 International Business Machines Corporation Progressive interleaved delivery of interactive descriptions and renderers for electronic publishing of merchandise
JP3728578B2 (en) * 1999-03-31 2005-12-21 富士通株式会社 Non-uniform error protection method in multi-carrier transmission and its encoder and decoder
US7952511B1 (en) 1999-04-07 2011-05-31 Geer James L Method and apparatus for the detection of objects using electromagnetic wave attenuation patterns
US6947748B2 (en) * 2000-12-15 2005-09-20 Adaptix, Inc. OFDMA with adaptive subcarrier-cluster configuration and selective loading
FR2820902B1 (en) 2001-02-14 2003-04-18 Alstom METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CONTROLLING AND REGULATING AN AC ROTATING ELECTRIC MACHINE, IN PARTICULAR SYNCHRONOUS
US7031400B2 (en) * 2001-03-30 2006-04-18 Texas Instruments Incorporated Method of selecting a PCM modem signal constellation in relation to channel impairments
CA2438138C (en) * 2001-03-30 2007-03-13 S. Merrill Weiss Digital signal transmitter synchronization system
US7093277B2 (en) * 2001-05-30 2006-08-15 Digeo, Inc. System and method for improved multi-stream multimedia transmission and processing
US6962219B2 (en) * 2001-09-17 2005-11-08 Mtd Products Inc Mechanical ZTR system with steering wheel
US6909753B2 (en) * 2001-12-05 2005-06-21 Koninklijke Philips Electronics, N.V. Combined MPEG-4 FGS and modulation algorithm for wireless video transmission
US6907028B2 (en) * 2002-02-14 2005-06-14 Nokia Corporation Clock-based time slicing
US7130313B2 (en) * 2002-02-14 2006-10-31 Nokia Corporation Time-slice signaling for broadband digital broadcasting
JP4030964B2 (en) * 2002-02-28 2008-01-09 富士通株式会社 Radio base station used in CDMA communication
US20030162543A1 (en) * 2002-02-28 2003-08-28 Nokia Corporation System and method for interrupt-free hand-over in a mobile terminal
US7844214B2 (en) * 2002-03-02 2010-11-30 Nokia Corporation System and method for broadband digital broadcasting
US7620111B2 (en) * 2002-08-13 2009-11-17 Nokia Corporation Symbol interleaving
US7058034B2 (en) 2002-09-09 2006-06-06 Nokia Corporation Phase shifted time slice transmission to improve handover
US20040057400A1 (en) * 2002-09-24 2004-03-25 Nokia Corporation Anti-synchronous radio channel slicing for smoother handover and continuous service reception
JP4353774B2 (en) * 2002-12-04 2009-10-28 パナソニック株式会社 Data transmission method and data reception method, and transmission apparatus and reception apparatus using them
CN1788441B (en) * 2003-04-23 2011-05-11 耐凯特·凯斯夫·帕特沃德汉 Rate adaptive data broadcast technique
US20050009523A1 (en) * 2003-07-07 2005-01-13 Nokia Corporation Protocol using forward error correction to improve handover
CN1886958B (en) * 2003-11-26 2010-08-18 松下电器产业株式会社 Reception device and transmission device
JP4460412B2 (en) * 2003-11-26 2010-05-12 パナソニック株式会社 Reception device and partial bit determination method
EP1555821A1 (en) * 2004-01-13 2005-07-20 Sony International (Europe) GmbH Method for pre-processing digital data, digital to analog and analog to digital conversion system
US7660583B2 (en) * 2004-03-19 2010-02-09 Nokia Corporation Advanced handover in phased-shifted and time-sliced networks
ATE504128T1 (en) * 2004-03-30 2011-04-15 Modesat Comm Ou SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING QAM SIGNALS AT LOW SIGNAL-TO-NOISE RATIO
WO2005109895A1 (en) * 2004-05-12 2005-11-17 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Scalable video coding for broadcasting
KR100933120B1 (en) * 2004-06-16 2009-12-21 삼성전자주식회사 Apparatus and method for transmitting/receiving data in a code division multiplexing-frequency hopping-orthogonal frequency division multiple access communication system
US7554482B2 (en) * 2004-09-15 2009-06-30 Aviation Communication & Surveillance Systems Systems and methods for using a TCAS directional antenna for omnidirectional transmission
US7345626B2 (en) 2004-09-15 2008-03-18 Aviation Communication & Sureillance Systems, Llc Pulse transmitters having multiple outputs in phase relationship and methods of operation
US20060133338A1 (en) * 2004-11-23 2006-06-22 Interdigital Technology Corporation Method and system for securing wireless communications
EP1859541A1 (en) * 2005-03-08 2007-11-28 QUALCOMM Flarion Technologies, Inc. Methods and apparatus for efficient digital broadcast signaling in a wireless communications system
US8913634B2 (en) * 2005-04-01 2014-12-16 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc. Method and apparatus facilitating multi mode interfaces
US7970345B2 (en) * 2005-06-22 2011-06-28 Atc Technologies, Llc Systems and methods of waveform and/or information splitting for wireless transmission of information to one or more radioterminals over a plurality of transmission paths and/or system elements
WO2007014030A2 (en) * 2005-07-22 2007-02-01 Infinitrak Llc Steering systems, steering and speed coordination systems, and associated vehicles
US8254913B2 (en) 2005-08-18 2012-08-28 Smartsky Networks LLC Terrestrial based high speed data communications mesh network
GB0517200D0 (en) 2005-08-22 2005-09-28 Torotrak Dev Ltd Driving and steering of motor vehicles
GB0517201D0 (en) 2005-08-22 2005-09-28 Torotrak Dev Ltd Driving and steering of motor vehicles
EP1938596A4 (en) * 2005-09-27 2012-03-28 Korea Electronics Telecomm Apparatus for transmitting and receiving digital multimedia broadcasting for high-quality video service
WO2007037424A1 (en) * 2005-09-30 2007-04-05 Pioneer Corporation Receiver apparatus
JP4611864B2 (en) * 2005-10-28 2011-01-12 Kddi株式会社 Transmission method
CN101467416B (en) * 2006-06-16 2013-11-06 高通股份有限公司 Method for transmission using partitioned blocks of multicarrier symbols
WO2007147146A2 (en) 2006-06-16 2007-12-21 Qualcomm Incorporated Progressively broadcasting information in beacon signals
WO2008049025A2 (en) 2006-10-17 2008-04-24 Mtd Products, Inc. Vehicle control systems and methods
US7778360B2 (en) * 2007-01-09 2010-08-17 Fujitsu Limited Demodulating a signal encoded according to ASK modulation and PSK modulation
DK3264780T3 (en) * 2007-04-18 2020-07-27 Dolby Int Ab CODING SYSTEMS USING SUPPLEMENTARY SEQUENCE PARAMETER SETS FOR SCALABLE VIDEO CODING OR MULTI-DISPLAY CODING
US20140072058A1 (en) 2010-03-05 2014-03-13 Thomson Licensing Coding systems
PL2197132T3 (en) 2007-10-01 2018-11-30 Panasonic Corporation Radio communication device and response signal spreading method
ES2566531T3 (en) * 2007-12-22 2016-04-13 Fresenius Medical Care Deutschland Gmbh Method and device for determining transmembrane pressure in an extracorporeal blood treatment
US8248910B2 (en) * 2008-01-29 2012-08-21 Nokia Corporation Physical layer and data link layer signalling in digital video broadcast preamble symbols
US8136613B2 (en) 2008-03-26 2012-03-20 Mtd Products Inc Vehicle control systems and methods
US20110156494A1 (en) * 2008-08-25 2011-06-30 Governing Dynamics Llc Wireless Energy Transfer System
NZ623986A (en) 2011-09-22 2016-03-31 Mtd Products Inc Vehicle control system
JP6285621B2 (en) * 2011-10-31 2018-02-28 寧波瀛震机械部件有限公司 Switchable fluid nozzle
ITMI20112194A1 (en) * 2011-12-01 2013-06-02 Milano Politecnico METHOD OF CODIFICATION OF AN INFORMATION FLOW, IN PARTICULAR FOR THE TRANSMISSION OF A CODIFIED SIGNAL ON A CHANNEL AFFECTED BY PHASE NOISE, AND ITS RELATED DECODING METHOD
JP6677482B2 (en) * 2015-10-30 2020-04-08 日本放送協会 Hierarchical encoding device and transmission device
CN110198285B (en) * 2019-05-17 2022-02-08 中国工程物理研究院电子工程研究所 Method for improving efficiency of measurement and control transmitter with 16APSK modulation system
US11223762B2 (en) * 2019-12-06 2022-01-11 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Device and method for processing high-resolution image
CN114019579B (en) * 2021-08-24 2023-11-24 中国农业科学院农业资源与农业区划研究所 High space-time resolution near-surface air temperature reconstruction method, system and equipment

Family Cites Families (133)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US518112A (en) * 1894-04-10 Machine for making shoes or covers for pneumatic tires
DE2245189C3 (en) 1971-09-18 1980-09-25 Fujitsu Ltd., Kawasaki, Kanagawa (Japan) Apparatus for the transmission of a vestigial sideband carrier-modulated multilevel signal and a synchronizing pilot signal
US3909721A (en) 1972-01-31 1975-09-30 Signatron Signal processing system
US3824548A (en) 1973-01-15 1974-07-16 Us Navy Satellite communications link monitor
US3909821A (en) 1973-10-04 1975-09-30 Gen Public Utilities Communicating over power lines
NL168099C (en) 1974-09-12 1982-02-16 Philips Nv MODULATION AND FILTER DEVICE FOR DIGITAL SIGNALS.
JPS5513625B2 (en) 1975-02-05 1980-04-10
IT1052696B (en) 1975-12-18 1981-07-20 Cselt Centro Studi Lab Telecom PROCEDURE AND NUMERICAL DEVICE FOR THE ADAPTIVE CORRECTION OF THE PHASE IN THE COHERENT DEMODULATION OF NUMERICAL SIGNALS
CH609510A5 (en) 1976-06-18 1979-02-28 Ibm
JPS53108215A (en) 1977-03-02 1978-09-20 Nec Corp Monitor system
JPS5855709B2 (en) 1977-05-07 1983-12-10 三菱電機株式会社 phase demodulator
FR2428946A1 (en) 1978-06-13 1980-01-11 Ibm France METHOD AND DEVICE FOR INITIALIZING AN ADAPTIVE EQUALIZER FROM AN UNKNOWN DATA SIGNAL IN A TRANSMISSION SYSTEM USING QUADRATURE AMPLITUDE MODULATION
US4267592A (en) 1979-03-30 1981-05-12 Rockwell International Corporation Anti-jam radio
FR2457048A1 (en) 1979-05-16 1980-12-12 Telediffusion Fse VIDEOTEX SYSTEM PROVIDED WITH PROTECTION AGAINST TRANSMISSION ERRORS
US4309726A (en) 1979-05-28 1982-01-05 Hitachi, Ltd. Muting circuit in a PCM recording and reproducing apparatus
US4271527A (en) 1979-08-31 1981-06-02 Paradyne Corporation Double side band-quadrature carrier modulation signal structures
US4303939A (en) 1980-08-11 1981-12-01 Rca Corporation Horizontal stability measurement apparatus
US4564858A (en) 1981-03-31 1986-01-14 Harris Corporation Television SAW/VSB filter incorporating receiver equalizer
US4525846A (en) 1982-12-27 1985-06-25 Paradyne Corporation Modem in-band secondary channel via radial modulation
US4597090A (en) 1983-04-14 1986-06-24 Codex Corporation Block coded modulation system
US4472747A (en) 1983-04-19 1984-09-18 Compusound, Inc. Audio digital recording and playback system
US4581639A (en) 1983-10-17 1986-04-08 Tektronix, Inc. Method and apparatus for monitoring suitability of a transmission path for transmission of digital data signals
AU576787B2 (en) * 1983-11-07 1988-09-08 Sony Corporation Satellite to cable television interface
US4630287A (en) 1983-12-28 1986-12-16 Paradyne Corporation Secondary channel signalling in a QAM data point constellation
JPS61501670A (en) 1984-03-28 1986-08-07 アメリカン テレフオン アンド テレグラフ カムパニ− Single sideband communication system
US4535352A (en) 1984-04-16 1985-08-13 At&T Bell Laboratories Technique for generating semi-compatible high definition television signals for transmission over two cable TV channels
US4601045A (en) 1984-08-03 1986-07-15 Larse Corporation Modulator-demodulator method and apparatus with efficient bandwidth utilization
JPS61154227A (en) 1984-12-26 1986-07-12 Mitsubishi Electric Corp Two-stage coding method
US4679227A (en) * 1985-05-20 1987-07-07 Telebit Corporation Ensemble modem structure for imperfect transmission media
JPS62133842A (en) 1985-12-05 1987-06-17 Fujitsu Ltd Multi-value orthogonal amplitude modulation system
CA1268828A (en) 1986-02-08 1990-05-08 Yasuharu Yoshida Multilevel modulator capable of producing a composite modulated signal comprising a quadrature amplitude modulated component and a phase modulated component
US4757495A (en) * 1986-03-05 1988-07-12 Telebit Corporation Speech and data multiplexor optimized for use over impaired and bandwidth restricted analog channels
GB2189366B (en) 1986-04-17 1989-12-28 British Broadcasting Corp Method and apparatus for conveying information signals
US4914655A (en) 1986-06-20 1990-04-03 American Telephone And Telegraph Company Multiplexing arrangement for a digital transmission system
JPH0685512B2 (en) 1986-07-21 1994-10-26 日本電信電話株式会社 Wireless communication system
US4817192A (en) 1986-10-31 1989-03-28 Motorola, Inc. Dual-mode AFC circuit for an SSB radio transceiver
US4945549A (en) * 1986-11-13 1990-07-31 The United States Of America As Represented By The Administrator Of The National Aeronautics And Space Administration Trellis coded modulation for transmission over fading mobile satellite channel
US4794447A (en) 1986-11-17 1988-12-27 North American Philips Corporation Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving a high definition NTSC compatible television signal over a single DBS channel in time division multiplex form
JP2528108B2 (en) 1987-01-22 1996-08-28 株式会社日立製作所 Method and apparatus for transmitting video signal
DE277000T1 (en) 1987-01-27 1988-11-24 Victor Company Of Japan, Ltd., Yokohama, Kanagawa, Jp MAGNETIC RECORDING AND / OR PLAYING DEVICE.
US4882725A (en) 1987-01-30 1989-11-21 Hitachi, Ltd. Multiplex transmission method and apparatus
US4882733A (en) 1987-03-13 1989-11-21 Ford Aerospace Corporation Method and apparatus for combining encoding and modulation
US4800426A (en) 1987-05-18 1989-01-24 New York Institute Of Technology Method and system for transmission and reception of high definition
US5050188A (en) 1987-06-12 1991-09-17 Josef Dirr Method and apparatus for transmitting coded information
US4998213A (en) * 1987-06-15 1991-03-05 Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. Recording apparatus
JP2515809B2 (en) 1987-06-29 1996-07-10 株式会社日立製作所 Digital transmission system
JPS6468144A (en) 1987-09-09 1989-03-14 Fujitsu Ltd Squelch system for data receiver
US4873701A (en) 1987-09-16 1989-10-10 Penril Corporation Modem and method for 8 dimensional trellis code modulation
JPS6474836A (en) 1987-09-17 1989-03-20 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Voice encoder
US4891806A (en) 1987-09-18 1990-01-02 Racal Data Communications Inc. Constellation multiplexed inband secondary channel for voiceband modem
FR2621188B1 (en) 1987-09-25 1989-12-29 Labo Electronique Physique CIRCUIT FOR RECOVERING THE CARRIER WAVE OF DIGITAL TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS
EP0311188A3 (en) 1987-10-06 1989-08-16 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. System for broadcasting hdtv images over standard television frequency channels
US5142353A (en) * 1987-12-23 1992-08-25 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Television signal processing apparatus
EP0329158B1 (en) 1988-02-19 1994-06-22 Josef Dirr Method for the digital and/or analog coding of the information of one, two or several channels, and/or frequency or bandwidth reduction, and/or increase of the transmission security
WO1989008366A1 (en) * 1988-02-29 1989-09-08 General Electric Company Extended definition widescreen television system using plural signal transmission channels
JPH0783337B2 (en) 1988-03-01 1995-09-06 日本電気株式会社 Scramble-descramble method
US4985769A (en) 1988-03-23 1991-01-15 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Multiplex TV signal processing apparatus
US4940954A (en) 1988-04-12 1990-07-10 General Electric Company Unbalanced quadrature PSK modulator-limiter
US5023889A (en) 1988-05-31 1991-06-11 California Institute Of Technology Trellis coded multilevel DPSK system with doppler correction for mobile satellite channels
US4855692A (en) 1988-06-20 1989-08-08 Northern Telecom Limited Method of quadrature-phase amplitude modulation
US5282019A (en) * 1988-10-03 1994-01-25 Carlo Basile Method and apparatus for the transmission and reception of a multicarrier digital television signal
US5134464A (en) 1990-11-16 1992-07-28 North American Philips Corporation Method and apparatus for the transmission and reception of a multicarrier digital television signal
US4918437A (en) 1988-10-13 1990-04-17 Motorola, Inc. High data rate simulcast communication system
AU628102B2 (en) 1988-10-21 1992-09-10 Thomson-Csf Emitter, transmission method and receiver
US4937844A (en) 1988-11-03 1990-06-26 Racal Data Communications Inc. Modem with data compression selected constellation
US4912706A (en) 1988-11-18 1990-03-27 American Telephone And Telegraph Company Frame synchronization in a network of time multiplexed optical space switches
US5038402A (en) 1988-12-06 1991-08-06 General Instrument Corporation Apparatus and method for providing digital audio in the FM broadcast band
JP2774296B2 (en) 1989-01-20 1998-07-09 キヤノン株式会社 Information processing method and apparatus
US5168509A (en) 1989-04-12 1992-12-01 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Quadrature amplitude modulation communication system with transparent error correction
JPH07114419B2 (en) 1989-04-12 1995-12-06 株式会社東芝 QAM communication system
US5128758A (en) 1989-06-02 1992-07-07 North American Philips Corporation Method and apparatus for digitally processing a high definition television augmentation signal
JP2740284B2 (en) * 1989-08-09 1998-04-15 三洋電機株式会社 Photovoltaic element
US5148422A (en) 1989-08-25 1992-09-15 Sony Corporation Optical recording medium having a data recording track with offset data storing regions
JP2805095B2 (en) * 1989-10-31 1998-09-30 ソニー株式会社 Video signal recording device
US5124852A (en) 1989-11-10 1992-06-23 Victor Company Of Japan, Ltd. Magnetic tape recording apparatus
US5029003A (en) 1989-12-18 1991-07-02 General Electric Company Apparatus for incorporating digital signals with a standard TV signal
KR910013904A (en) 1989-12-21 1991-08-08 강진구 POP playback TV using HD screen
KR920010043B1 (en) 1989-12-28 1992-11-13 삼성전자 주식회사 Normal tv and hd-tv scene signal selection apparatus and method
EP0436251B1 (en) 1989-12-29 1995-09-27 Laboratoires D'electronique Philips Coder/decoder for digital signals to be transmitted and/or stored
JP2842913B2 (en) 1990-01-24 1999-01-06 株式会社日立製作所 Wide television signal processing circuit
US5063574A (en) 1990-03-06 1991-11-05 Moose Paul H Multi-frequency differentially encoded digital communication for high data rate transmission through unequalized channels
FR2660131B1 (en) * 1990-03-23 1992-06-19 France Etat DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING DIGITAL DATA WITH AT LEAST TWO LEVELS OF PROTECTION, AND CORRESPONDING RECEPTION DEVICE.
JPH03274880A (en) 1990-03-23 1991-12-05 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Television signal multiplex transmission device
US5063445A (en) 1990-04-19 1991-11-05 Nippon Hoso Kyokai Multiple sub-sampling transmitting/receiving system performing interfield and interframe offset sub-sampling of a broad bandwidth television signal
US5519730A (en) * 1990-06-12 1996-05-21 Jasper; Steven C. Communication signal having a time domain pilot component
EP0486667A4 (en) * 1990-06-12 1993-08-11 Motorola, Inc. Communication signal having a time domain pilot component
JPH0486183A (en) * 1990-07-30 1992-03-18 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Video signal recording and reproducing device
US5115453A (en) 1990-10-01 1992-05-19 At&T Bell Laboratories Technique for designing a multidimensional signaling scheme
US5086340A (en) * 1990-10-19 1992-02-04 Zenith Electronics Corporation Co-channel interference reduction system for digital high definition television
US5105442A (en) * 1990-11-07 1992-04-14 At&T Bell Laboratories Coded modulation with unequal error protection
US5164963A (en) * 1990-11-07 1992-11-17 At&T Bell Laboratories Coding for digital transmission
US5087975A (en) * 1990-11-09 1992-02-11 Zenith Electronics Corporation VSB HDTV transmission system with reduced NTSC co-channel interference
US5291289A (en) 1990-11-16 1994-03-01 North American Philips Corporation Method and apparatus for transmission and reception of a digital television signal using multicarrier modulation
US5214656A (en) 1990-12-13 1993-05-25 At&T Bell Laboratories Multiplexed coded modulation with unequal error protection
US5170413A (en) * 1990-12-24 1992-12-08 Motorola, Inc. Control strategy for reuse system assignments and handoff
US5287180A (en) * 1991-02-04 1994-02-15 General Electric Company Modulator/demodulater for compatible high definition television system
FR2672755B1 (en) * 1991-02-12 1993-05-07 Thomson Csf BINARY CODING METHOD OF THE POINTS OF A CONSTELLATION USED IN A MULTI-CARRIER MODULATION OF THE OFDM TYPE.
US5838727A (en) * 1991-02-15 1998-11-17 Schlumberger Technology Corporation Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving digital data over a bandpass channel
US5181112A (en) 1991-03-11 1993-01-19 Zenith Electronics Corporation Television signal transmission system with carrier offset compensation
US5600672A (en) 1991-03-27 1997-02-04 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Communication system
EP0975174B1 (en) * 1991-03-27 2003-08-27 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Signal transmission system
DE69223961T2 (en) * 1991-06-03 1998-07-30 British Telecomm Radio system
US5598220A (en) 1991-07-18 1997-01-28 Zenith Electronics Corporation Digital signal with multilevel symbols and sync recognition
US5233629A (en) 1991-07-26 1993-08-03 General Instrument Corporation Method and apparatus for communicating digital data using trellis coded qam
US5243629A (en) * 1991-09-03 1993-09-07 At&T Bell Laboratories Multi-subcarrier modulation for hdtv transmission
US5210770A (en) * 1991-09-27 1993-05-11 Lockheed Missiles & Space Company, Inc. Multiple-signal spread-spectrum transceiver
US5544328A (en) 1991-10-31 1996-08-06 At&T Bell Laboratories Coded modulation with unequal error protection
US5311547A (en) * 1992-02-03 1994-05-10 At&T Bell Laboratories Partial-response-channel precoding
US5363408A (en) * 1992-03-24 1994-11-08 General Instrument Corporation Mode selective quadrature amplitude modulation communication system
US5802241A (en) * 1992-03-26 1998-09-01 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Communication system
US7158577B1 (en) * 1992-03-26 2007-01-02 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Communication system
CN1032099C (en) * 1992-03-26 1996-06-19 松下电器产业株式会社 System of communication
US5892879A (en) * 1992-03-26 1999-04-06 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Communication system for plural data streams
US5267021A (en) * 1992-04-03 1993-11-30 The Trustees Of Columbia University In The City Of New York Multiresolution digital television broadcast system
US5400084A (en) 1992-05-14 1995-03-21 Hitachi America, Ltd. Method and apparatus for NTSC signal interference cancellation using recursive digital notch filters
AU5550694A (en) * 1992-11-06 1994-06-08 Pericle Communications Company Adaptive data rate modem
US5576902A (en) 1993-01-13 1996-11-19 Hitachi America, Ltd. Method and apparatus directed to processing trick play video data to compensate for intentionally omitted data
US5377051A (en) 1993-01-13 1994-12-27 Hitachi America, Ltd. Digital video recorder compatible receiver with trick play image enhancement
US5565926A (en) * 1993-05-07 1996-10-15 Philips Electronics North America Corporation Method and apparatus for communicating digital television signals using a signal constellation formed by four signal constellations placed in the quadrants
JPH0775099A (en) 1993-05-07 1995-03-17 Philips Electron Nv Transmission method, transmitter and receiver for transmitting multiplex orthogonal-amplitude-modulation type television
US5452015A (en) * 1994-02-10 1995-09-19 Philips Electronics North America Corporation Method and apparatus for combating co-channel NTSC interference for digital TV transmission
US5398073A (en) * 1994-04-12 1995-03-14 At&T Corp. Concatenated coded vestigial sideband modulation for high definition television
US5565932A (en) * 1994-11-08 1996-10-15 Zenith Electronics Corp. AGC system with pilot using digital data reference
US5638112A (en) 1995-08-07 1997-06-10 Zenith Electronics Corp. Hybrid analog/digital STB
US5950124A (en) * 1995-09-06 1999-09-07 Telxon Corporation Cellular communication system with dynamically modified data transmission parameters
US5706428A (en) * 1996-03-14 1998-01-06 Lucent Technologies Inc. Multirate wireless data communication system
AU2002224450A1 (en) * 2000-11-03 2002-05-15 Aryya Communications, Inc. Wideband multi-protocol wireless radio transceiver system
US20030082153A1 (en) 2001-10-22 2003-05-01 The Government Of The United States Of America Stem cells that transform to beating cardiomyocytes
US6977944B2 (en) * 2002-01-12 2005-12-20 Conexant, Inc. Transmission protection for communications networks having stations operating with different modulation formats
JP2004159207A (en) 2002-11-08 2004-06-03 Alps Electric Co Ltd Radio communication device
CN2627574Y (en) 2003-06-25 2004-07-21 Tcl集团股份有限公司 Super Cat.5 information module
CN1321477C (en) 2003-10-28 2007-06-13 比亚迪股份有限公司 Lithium ion secondary cell
CN1240477C (en) 2004-01-15 2006-02-08 沧州市冀中化工厂 Thermostable strong acid cation resin catalyst and its preparing method

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
DE69331670D1 (en) 2002-04-11
DE69334312D1 (en) 2010-02-11
ATE216818T1 (en) 2002-05-15
JP3154707B2 (en) 2001-04-09
ATE453995T1 (en) 2010-01-15
DE69333523D1 (en) 2004-06-24
DE69333972T2 (en) 2006-08-17
EP1039673B1 (en) 2002-04-24
EP1039681A2 (en) 2000-09-27
CA2092495C (en) 1998-07-28
ATE317193T1 (en) 2006-02-15
DK1039681T3 (en) 2002-08-12
DE69331668T2 (en) 2002-10-31
ES2221919T3 (en) 2005-01-16
DE69333977D1 (en) 2006-04-20
PT1039675E (en) 2002-08-30
PT1039678E (en) 2002-08-30
KR960002468B1 (en) 1996-02-17
ATE317192T1 (en) 2006-02-15
ES2258180T3 (en) 2006-08-16
JP2001211138A (en) 2001-08-03
EP1330089A2 (en) 2003-07-23
ES2178992T3 (en) 2003-01-16
EP1330090A3 (en) 2003-08-13
CA2332405A1 (en) 1993-09-27
EP1049284A2 (en) 2000-11-02
EP1039682B1 (en) 2002-03-06
US7352822B2 (en) 2008-04-01
DE69331856D1 (en) 2002-05-29
DE69333977T2 (en) 2006-08-17
EP1039675B1 (en) 2002-03-06
JP2004135288A (en) 2004-04-30
EP1039679A3 (en) 2000-12-06
US5999569A (en) 1999-12-07
EP1039677A2 (en) 2000-09-27
EP1039680B1 (en) 2002-03-06
DK1154608T3 (en) 2010-05-31
ES2258181T3 (en) 2006-08-16
EP1039677A3 (en) 2000-12-06
ES2178990T3 (en) 2003-01-16
EP1039673A2 (en) 2000-09-27
EP1330088A3 (en) 2003-08-13
EP1154608B1 (en) 2010-02-17
JP2004096739A (en) 2004-03-25
ES2337033T3 (en) 2010-04-20
EP1039678B1 (en) 2002-04-24
DE69331671D1 (en) 2002-04-11
JP3154705B2 (en) 2001-04-09
ATE216819T1 (en) 2002-05-15
DE69331860D1 (en) 2002-05-29
CA2226489A1 (en) 1993-09-27
DE69331853D1 (en) 2002-05-29
ES2178995T3 (en) 2003-01-16
EP2180649A1 (en) 2010-04-28
PT1039673E (en) 2002-08-30
ATE453994T1 (en) 2010-01-15
US7362813B2 (en) 2008-04-22
DK1039679T3 (en) 2002-08-12
JP2000315992A (en) 2000-11-14
EP1039676B1 (en) 2002-04-24
PT1039681E (en) 2002-08-30
ATE216817T1 (en) 2002-05-15
DE69331858D1 (en) 2002-05-29
DK1330089T3 (en) 2006-06-06
DK1330090T3 (en) 2006-06-06
EP1039674A3 (en) 2000-12-06
EP1330089A3 (en) 2003-08-13
JP3359335B2 (en) 2002-12-24
EP1330090B1 (en) 2006-02-01
ES2178989T3 (en) 2003-01-16
DE69331854T2 (en) 2002-11-28
DK1330088T3 (en) 2006-06-06
DE69331859D1 (en) 2002-05-29
JP3154706B2 (en) 2001-04-09
ES2337034T3 (en) 2010-04-20
PT1039677E (en) 2002-08-30
ES2178988T3 (en) 2003-01-16
EP1039680A3 (en) 2000-12-06
DE69331853T2 (en) 2003-04-03
JP3472774B2 (en) 2003-12-02
JP2000312197A (en) 2000-11-07
JPH06164665A (en) 1994-06-10
EP1039675A2 (en) 2000-09-27
PT1049284E (en) 2002-08-30
DE69331855T2 (en) 2002-11-28
EP1330093B1 (en) 2009-12-30
DE69331667D1 (en) 2002-04-11
CN1076816A (en) 1993-09-29
KR930020993A (en) 1993-10-20
PT1330092E (en) 2010-03-08
JP2005192222A (en) 2005-07-14
EP1330088A2 (en) 2003-07-23
EP1039679B1 (en) 2002-04-24
DE69331668D1 (en) 2002-04-11
DE69333971D1 (en) 2006-04-13
DE69331857T2 (en) 2002-11-28
DE69331667T2 (en) 2002-10-31
EP1045541A2 (en) 2000-10-18
ES2178994T3 (en) 2003-01-16
DK1039680T3 (en) 2002-06-24
JP2004096740A (en) 2004-03-25
ATE317617T1 (en) 2006-02-15
JP3643833B2 (en) 2005-04-27
DK1039676T3 (en) 2002-08-12
ATE214217T1 (en) 2002-03-15
ATE216815T1 (en) 2002-05-15
DK1039674T3 (en) 2002-08-05
ES2259397T3 (en) 2006-10-01
EP1039675A3 (en) 2000-12-06
EP0562875A1 (en) 1993-09-29
DE69334311D1 (en) 2010-02-11
ATE216816T1 (en) 2002-05-15
DE69331669D1 (en) 2002-04-11
JP2002057650A (en) 2002-02-22
EP1049283B1 (en) 2002-04-24
DK1039675T3 (en) 2002-06-24
US20080069259A1 (en) 2008-03-20
EP1330089B1 (en) 2006-02-08
EP1039676A2 (en) 2000-09-27
EP1330092A2 (en) 2003-07-23
DK1049283T3 (en) 2002-08-12
PT1039674E (en) 2002-08-30
EP1039677B1 (en) 2002-04-24
JP2003110643A (en) 2003-04-11
JP3643836B2 (en) 2005-04-27
DE69331859T2 (en) 2003-04-03
EP1049283A3 (en) 2000-12-06
PT1330093E (en) 2010-03-09
US20040161049A1 (en) 2004-08-19
EP1039673A3 (en) 2000-12-06
DK1039673T3 (en) 2002-08-12
ES2173842T3 (en) 2002-11-01
CA2331203C (en) 2004-12-07
ATE214214T1 (en) 2002-03-15
PT1330089E (en) 2006-06-30
JP3109552B2 (en) 2000-11-20
ATE214216T1 (en) 2002-03-15
DE69331858T2 (en) 2002-11-28
US20040086056A1 (en) 2004-05-06
ATE216812T1 (en) 2002-05-15
US5819000A (en) 1998-10-06
CA2092495A1 (en) 1993-09-27
ATE214218T1 (en) 2002-03-15
EP1330088B1 (en) 2006-02-01
EP1039676A3 (en) 2000-12-06
EP1039682A2 (en) 2000-09-27
EP1045541A3 (en) 2000-12-06
EP0562875B1 (en) 2004-05-19
JP3987526B2 (en) 2007-10-10
CN1032099C (en) 1996-06-19
PT1039682E (en) 2002-08-30
US20050018785A1 (en) 2005-01-27
DE69331856T2 (en) 2003-04-03
DE69331670T2 (en) 2002-10-31
ES2173067T3 (en) 2002-10-16
EP1330092A3 (en) 2003-08-13
PT1154608E (en) 2010-03-12
DK1039678T3 (en) 2002-08-12
DK1039682T3 (en) 2002-06-24
DK1045541T3 (en) 2002-06-24
DE69331669T2 (en) 2002-10-31
EP1039674B1 (en) 2002-04-24
ES2178991T3 (en) 2003-01-16
EP1049284B1 (en) 2002-03-06
EP1039678A3 (en) 2000-12-06
ES2173841T3 (en) 2002-11-01
JP3643834B2 (en) 2005-04-27
EP1154608A3 (en) 2002-09-25
EP1039682A3 (en) 2000-12-06
DE69331860T2 (en) 2002-11-28
ATE214215T1 (en) 2002-03-15
ES2338986T3 (en) 2010-05-14
PT562875E (en) 2004-09-30
DK1330093T3 (en) 2010-04-26
PT1045541E (en) 2002-08-30
ES2173066T3 (en) 2002-10-16
PT1039680E (en) 2002-08-30
JP2000299677A (en) 2000-10-24
EP1039678A2 (en) 2000-09-27
DK1049284T3 (en) 2002-06-24
PT1039679E (en) 2002-08-30
JP2000312195A (en) 2000-11-07
CA2331203A1 (en) 1993-09-27
PT1039676E (en) 2002-08-30
EP1039674A2 (en) 2000-09-27
JP2004135289A (en) 2004-04-30
DE69333972D1 (en) 2006-04-13
EP1330093A2 (en) 2003-07-23
DK1039677T3 (en) 2002-08-05
AU3552093A (en) 1993-09-30
US6256357B1 (en) 2001-07-03
DK1330092T3 (en) 2010-04-19
DK0562875T3 (en) 2004-08-09
ES2178993T3 (en) 2003-01-16
PT1330090E (en) 2006-06-30
ES2173065T3 (en) 2002-10-16
DE69331854D1 (en) 2002-05-29
DE69331671T2 (en) 2002-10-31
JP3643835B2 (en) 2005-04-27
EP1049283A2 (en) 2000-11-02
JP2004135290A (en) 2004-04-30
EP1039680A2 (en) 2000-09-27
AU655539B2 (en) 1994-12-22
EP1049284A3 (en) 2000-12-06
JP3643832B2 (en) 2005-04-27
CA2332405C (en) 2007-01-23
ATE216814T1 (en) 2002-05-15
EP1330090A2 (en) 2003-07-23
EP1154608A2 (en) 2001-11-14
ATE216813T1 (en) 2002-05-15
PT1049283E (en) 2002-08-30
EP1045541B1 (en) 2002-03-06
EP1330092B1 (en) 2009-12-30
EP1330093A3 (en) 2003-08-13
JP3359327B2 (en) 2002-12-24
EP1039681B1 (en) 2002-04-24
ATE458339T1 (en) 2010-03-15
US7496146B2 (en) 2009-02-24
EP1039681A3 (en) 2000-12-06
JP3154704B2 (en) 2001-04-09
ATE267492T1 (en) 2004-06-15
EP1039681B9 (en) 2004-11-17
DE69333523T2 (en) 2005-06-23
EP1039679A2 (en) 2000-09-27
DE69331855D1 (en) 2002-05-29
JP2000312196A (en) 2000-11-07
DE69331857D1 (en) 2002-05-29
PT1330088E (en) 2006-06-30

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CA2226489C (en) Communication system
EP0975171B1 (en) Signal transmission system
US6549716B1 (en) Communication system
US20020097336A1 (en) Communication system
US20080215951A1 (en) Communication system
US7158577B1 (en) Communication system

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
EEER Examination request